Contract Cleaning and Pest Management Sectors · a learning resource guide and directory information about traineeships in the Property Services industry copies of the endorsed national

PRM98 Asset Maintenance Training Package © Australian National Training Authority (ANTA) 1998

Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

1

Property Services Training Australia

Asset Maintenance Training Package - PRM98

Contract Cleaning and Pest Management Sectors

Leading to

Asset Maintenance Training Package - This Volume

PRM98 – Contract Cleaning and Pest Management Sectors

PRM20198 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Cleaning Operations)

PRM30198 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Cleaning Operations)

PRM40198 Certificate IV in Asset Maintenance (Cleaning Operations Management)

PRM20298 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management – Technical)

PRM20398 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management – Business Operations)

PRM30298 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management – Technical)

PRM30398 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management – Business Operations)

PRM40298 Certificate IV in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management)

Asset Maintenance Training Package - Associated Volumes

PRM98 – Portable Fire Equipment Service Operations Sector

PRM20400 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Portable Fire Equipment Service Operations)

PRM30400 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Portable Fire Equipment Service Operations)

PRM98 Waste Management Sector

PRM20500 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Waste Management)

PRM30500 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Waste Management)

PRM40500 Certificate IV in Asset Maintenance (Waste Management)

ENDORSED DECEMBER 1998


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

2

Acknowledgements Developed by Property Services Training Australia (PSTA) PSTA would like to acknowledge the contribution of all the participants in this project. These include employers, employees, training managers in leading enterprises and the industry associations of which they are members. All were generous in giving their time and sharing ideas and experiences. A special acknowledgement is due to peak national industry organisations and their constituent sate and territory networks for assisting PSTA with contacts, intellectual contributions and understanding of the industry environment. George Chin Chair

Copyright © Australian National Training Authority (ANTA), 2000 Level 11, AMP Place 10 Eagle Street BRISBANE QLD 4000 Phone: (07) 3246 2300 Fax: (07) 3246 2490 All rights reserved. This work has been produced initially with the assistance of funding provided by the Commonwealth Government through ANTA. This work is copyright, but permission is given to teachers, trainers and assessors to make copies by photocopying or other duplicating processes for use within their own training organisation or in a workplace where the training is being conducted. This permission does not extend to the making of copies for use outside the immediate training environment for which they are made, nor the making of copies for hire or resale to third parties. For permission outside of these guidelines, apply in writing to Australian National Training Authority. This work is the result of wide consultations with many industry participants throughout Australia. Consequently it is a collaborative view not necessarily representing any specific body and no single body warrants its content or accepts any liability. Published by: Australian Training Products Ltd Level 25 / 150 Lonsdale St, Melbourne , 3000 PO Box 12211 A’Beckett St Post Ofice Melbourne, Victoria 8006, Australia Telephone +61 3 9655 0600 Facsimile +61 3 9639 4684 E-mail: [email protected] First published December, 1998 STOCK CODE: 7190001STD Printed for Australian Training Products Ltd. By Mercury Printeam, Melbourne, Victoria, AUSTRALIA Print Version No: 2.00

December 2000


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

3

CONTENTS

Page

OVERVIEW

TRAINING PACKAGES IN THE PROPERTY SERVICES INDUSTRY

1

SECTION 1: Assessment Guidelines in Asset Maintenance 3

1. Introduction

2. Standards as benchmarks for assessment

3. Role of Registered Training Organisations

4. Assessment pathways

5. Assessor qualifications

6. Guidelines for designing assessment resources

7. Guidelines for conducting assessments

8. Sources of information on assessment

3

5

7

8

10

12

14

19

SECTION 2: Qualifications 22

1. Introduction

2. Customisation of qualifications

3. Packaging and alignment of standards to the Australian Qualifications Framework

22

24

27

SECTION 3: The Competency Standards

Unit Index

Cleaning

Pest Management

39

40


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

4

Appendix A: Principles underpinning National Recognition Arrangements.

Appendix B: Key competencies in the standards.

Appendix C: AQF level descriptors.

Appendix D: Unit summary


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

5

MODIFICATION HISTORY – ENDORSED MATERIALS ASSET MAINTENANCE – PRM98 Sheet: 1 of 1

Ver

sion

Dat

e of

Rel

ease

Au

thor

isat

ion

:

Comments

1.00

31/11/98 NTQC Primary release

2.00

1/12/00 NTQC Version control information added to all three existing sectors plus new volume for Waste Management sector, incorporating 3 new qualifications, 60 new units, plus 24 extra imported units

Forms control: All endorsed training packages will have a version number displayed on the imprint page of every volume constituting that training package. Every training package will display an up-to-date copy of this modification history form, to be placed immediately after the contents page of the first volume of the training package. Comments on changes will only show sufficient detail to enable a user to identify the nature and location of the change. Changes to training packages will generally be batched at quarterly intervals. This modification history form will be included within any displayed sample of that training package and will constitute all detail available to identify changes.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

7

OVERVIEW

TRAINING PACKAGES IN THE PROPERTY SERVICES INDUSTRY

INTRODUCTION Effective vocational training, backed by meaningful qualifications, is vital for Australia’s prosperity. The new Australian Recognition Framework, including nationally agreed quality criteria, endorsed competency standards packaged and aligned to recognised qualifications and guidelines for assessment, provides a national framework in which Registered Training Organisations will operate. Within the agreed framework, providers will be able to deliver training services which meet the immediate and future employment needs of their clients. Registered Training Organisations (RTOs) using training packages face at least three challenges • to provide a practical, cost-effective but high quality service • To educate trainees to the performance (competency) standards expected in the workplace, and • To move from a traditional focus on classroom delivery to one which integrates work experience

and education in a variety of learning contexts, including the workplace.

TRAINING PACKAGES IN THE PROPERTY SERVICES INDUSTRY There are three training packages in the Property Services industry

Asset Development and Management, which covers all service areas dealing directly with the development, sale and management of property assets, particularly real property

Asset Maintenance, which covers those areas that provide services relating to the physical

maintenance of property assets (e.g. cleaning, waste and pest management services)

Asset Security, which deals with the security and protection of persons and property assets.

WHAT’S IN A TRAINING PACKAGE? The material included in each training package has been developed by experienced people in the industry and is designed to help RTOs meet the challenges outlined above. Training packages provide advice on the scope and content of qualifications which are recognised by the industry and by Government agencies across Australia. Packages also provide information on how individuals will be able to achieve national recognition of their competency in the sector in which they are employed. There are two parts to each package. The first (or ‘endorsable’) part is nationally endorsed by Federal and State and Territory Ministers for Vocational Education and Training and by industry. This part provides information on the performance (competency) standards required for recognition of competency in given work

areas in the industry an industry approach to assessment


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

8

the content and scope of qualifications and their alignment to the Australian Qualifications Framework

• industry features which affect the way in which learning and recognition takes place within the new

Australian Qualifications Framework, training organisations will be registered to deliver vocationally relevant services which meet the national industry competency standards, and lead to the award of nationally recognised qualifications.

The second (or ‘non-endorsable’) part of the training package is a ‘tool box’ of materials to support competency standards-based learning and assessment. This part of the package contains a career planner for candidates assessment instruments which will help the candidate gather evidence of competency professional development materials and guidance notes for trainers and assessors to help them

use the packages a learning resource guide and directory information about traineeships in the Property Services industry copies of the endorsed national competency standards for workplace assessors and trainers learning materials to support skill development in particular areas, e.g. English-as-a-second

language. The endorsable component supports national industry recognition, quality training and portable vocational education and training qualifications that articulate with other parts of the training system. The non-endorsed component supports training design, delivery, assessment and the recognition of competency. As a whole, the package supports the development of vocationally relevant learning and assessment arrangements in schools, vocational and higher education and training providers and in the workplace. The full range of teaching and learning strategies should be able to be used in the delivery of the training package. These include learning through practical demonstration, seminars, lectures, workshops, projects, distance learning, computer-based and self-paced activities. National training packages pay considerable attention to the assessment process. This is because the new system is designed to ensure that the attainment of qualifications is based on the demonstrated achievement of competency to the standard required in the workplace - and not just the achievement of criteria for completion of an agreed training course. In combination, the two parts of the package will help RTOs plan assessment, customise services to individual client needs and make judgments about the quality of evidence presented by candidates seeking national recognition. Information about the steps required for Training Organisations to be registered as providers can be obtained from State and Territory Training Authorities.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

9

SECTION ONE ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES IN ASSET MAINTENANCE

1. INTRODUCTION Assessment guidelines form one of the three endorsed components of Training Packages. They describe the industry’s preferred approach to assessment, consistent with the principles of the Australian Recognition Framework. Assessment is the process of collecting evidence and making judgments on whether competency has been achieved against workplace standards of performance. The Assessment Guidelines cover five broad areas • a description of the assessment system which operates in the industry • assessor qualifications • processes for designing assessment resources • guidelines for conducting assessments • sources of information on assessment These guidelines have been developed to help trainees, trainers and employers get the best possible result from their involvement in standards-based education and training. The guidelines have been developed by people experienced in the industry and will be of particular interest to registered training/assessment organisations, and State and Territory Recognition Authorities involved in planning or evaluating vocational education and training programs. The aim of the Assessment Guidelines is to outline the industry’s approach to assessment leading to the recognition of competency required for employment. The approach outlined in these guidelines underscores the high level of community trust and responsibility placed in companies and their employees and the industry’s concern to ensure that this trust is not breached. The guidelines cover Cleaning Operations; Cleaning supervision, Pest Management (technical) Pest Management (business operations) and Workplace training and assessment. The standards and their packaging and alignment to the AQF address the specific needs of key occupational groups in the services industry, including cleaners, supervisors, technicians and administrators.

1.1 Qualifications A qualification under the new framework will be substantially different from those currently issued. The main difference is that the new credential emphasises the individual’s ability to transfer and apply knowledge and skill under workplace conditions, rather than simply testifying the achievement of course requirements. The Asset Maintenance training package will be used to develop new types of training and assessment services which bring the world of work and the world of study and skill


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

10

development closer together. The achievement of qualifications in this framework will provide a new springboard for developing careers in the industry.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

11

2. STANDARDS AS BENCHMARKS FOR ASSESSMENT Credentials issued as a result of assessment against standards in the Asset Maintenance national training packages (either as Statements of Attainment against individual units, or as qualifications involving packages of units aligned to a qualification level) will carry credit in other relevant Asset Maintenance qualifications located in the AQF. The unit of competency is therefore an important building block in the qualifications structure. Competency is the application of knowledge and skill to achieve the standard of performance required in the workplace. Each unit of competency has been designed to help assessors and candidates for assessment collect evidence which demonstrates competency in relation to a work function performed in the industry. Information on criteria to address in planning and doing assessments can be found in various parts of each unit of competency in the standard.

Unit Title Work area or job function to be assessed

Elements Task(s) to be performed

Performance Criteria

Performance statement based on the application of knowledge and skill to the task

Range of Variables Context in which performance occurs and factors that affect performance

Evidence Guides

Support assessment of the four components of

competency:

Task skills

Contingency management

job role management

environmental management

• Language and literacy requirements

• Statements of underpinning knowledge and skill required for performance

• Guide to methods of assessments • Guide as to types of evidence that are

appropriate

Evidence guides may also contain information on which units may be batched for assessment

Figure 1: Structure of a unit of competency.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

12

When planning assessments, each of the components of the unit need to be taken into account. In some cases, it may be more cost effective to assess against a group of units, in which case the units may be batched for assessment. Irrespective of how the assessment is managed, it remains the responsibility of the Registered Training Organisation to ensure that the industry standard of competency is demonstrated.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

13

3. ROLE OF REGISTERED TRAINING ORGANISATIONS Assessment for national recognition must be undertaken by, or auspiced through, a Registered Training Organisation (RTO). RTOs have responsibility for assessments, including the recording and reporting of assessment outcomes, appeals and the issuing of qualifications and statements of attainment. The Registration of training organisations is bound by principles of Mutual Recognition agreed by State and Territory Recognition authorities in the context of the Australian Recognition Framework. Further details of the principles, processes and protocols which guide the Registration of Training Organisations is available through State and Territory Recognition Authorities and through ANTA. A summary of these principles is at appendix A. The scope of the registration of the training organisation identifies recognition for particular products and services delivered in specific areas of operation. RTOs can : • Deliver training, assess and issue nationally recognised qualifications and statements of

attainment • Provide assessment only services and issue nationally recognised qualifications and

Statements of Attainment. Registration is for a period of up to five years. Registration and re-registration depends on establishing compliance with relevant standards, measured by States and Territories.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

15

4. ASSESSMENT PATHWAYS People develop competency in different ways. Some will develop their competency on-the-job. Others will develop it in a classroom or in a combination of classroom-based and experiential learning. No matter how the learning occurs, competency standards based training must be assessed against an endorsed competency standard included in the Australian Recognition Framework for a qualification to be issued. The model adopted by the Asset Maintenance Industry provides for assessment against each element of competency in the unit standard, but recognition of competence can only be awarded against whole units of competency. By assessing against the standard, rather than against knowledge or learning outcomes in a course, competency developed inside as well as outside the formal learning system can be assessed and recognised by way of a qualification located in the part of the Australian Recognition Framework that applies to this industry. This doesn’t mean that formal, structured learning isn’t important. It simply recognises that knowledge and skills can be developed and applied in a variety of ways - not all of which rely on participation in formal education. However, irrespective of the way in which the knowledge and skills are acquired and developed, the outcome of the assessment process should be consistent, reliable and valid. Recognition of competency developed through structured education and training programs may require assessment of evidence produced through various combinations of learning activities. Some of these activities may require structured on-the-job learning. Some may involve structured off-the-job learning. Some may involve combinations of structured on and off-the-job learning. It may also be possible to combine recognition of prior learning with the recognition of current competency and 'gap train' to develop skills in areas regarded as needing further work. Irrespective of how the competency was acquired or developed, assessment against standards leads to recognition in the AQF, based on the assessor’s evaluation of evidence provided by the candidate. When these guidelines are applied in approved training schemes, such as traineeships, candidates for recognition may apply for a reduction in the term of their indenture, based on the achievement of designated units of competency in the training scheme. 4.1 New Apprenticeships All qualifications in this package are available for New Apprenticeships. New Apprenticeships include all forms of Traineeships and have a number of features including • a training agreement which links an industrial award or agreement, signed by the

employer and the person in training • They’re employment based • The training component is undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation (public or

private) • They result in the attainment of a qualification in the AQF


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

16

• They require attendance at training delivered by an RTO, and attendance at work 4.2 VET in Schools New traineeships can be offered to students still at school. A key feature of the VET in schools program is the recognition of all achievement, both general and vocational, on the senior secondary certificate or supporting documentation. In some cases, the training under the contract of training may result in a qualification while at school. In other cases, the qualification will not be completed until after the schooling has been completed. Figure 2: Industry recognition pathways and their relationship to traineeships 4.3 Recognition of competence Irrespective of the pathway chosen, the recognition of competency may be by way of a Statement of Attainment awarded against an individual unit of competency, or by way of a qualification, such as a Certificate, Diploma or Advanced Diploma, if packages of units are involved. The industry’s preferred model of assessment includes the opportunity for candidates to work through a process of self -evaluation of performance. This self-evaluation may be undertaken in liaison with supervisors, peers and/or mentors in the workplace as part of the preparation for formal assessment of competency.

Pathway 1: work experience

Pathway 2: structured off-the-job training

New Traineeship: structured on and off-the-job training

Assessment against Work

based outcomes

described in competency standards

Qualifications in the

Recognition Framework


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

17

5. ASSESSOR QUALIFICATIONS Registered Training Organisations have responsibility for ensuring the competency of people employed to deliver training and assessment services in relation to endorsed training packages.

“Assessments against competencies in the Training Package will be carried out in accordance with these endorsed guidelines. The guidelines include the necessary qualifications for those conducting assessments and provide for those situations where more than one person may contribute to the assessment and where the required technical and assessment competencies may not be held by any one person”. ANTA Guidelines, March 1998.

The industry recognizes that assessors perform the following role in relation to the assessment and recognition of competency ensure that candidates are prepared for assessment against endorsed competency

standards Provide copies of assessment instruments to candidates wishing to undergo formal

assessment Verify evidence of competency Liaise and work with various industry parties to explain the assessment process Record and report accurately the outcomes of the assessment event.

Under the new arrangements being implemented by State Recognition Authorities, training and assessment service organisations wishing to issue national qualifications based on endorsed training packages will need to be registered under guidelines established by State Recognition Authorities. Maintain certification processes and keep auditable records of assessment outcomes Provide students and other relevant parties with records of assessment outcomes Provide candidates with qualifications reflecting demonstrated competency

Given the nature of the industry and the speed with which existing training arrangements are undergoing change, a number of partnership arrangements with smaller providers, consulting firms, employers or equipment manufacturers/suppliers may be negotiated. It should be noted, however, that the Registered Training Organisation issuing the qualification remains the peak agency responsible and accountable to VET Ministries for the legality and quality of these arrangements. The use of these partnership arrangements means that assessments, while remaining the responsibility of the Registered Training Organisation, may be undertaken by a range of individuals with varying levels of skills - and various qualifications. Individuals wishing to act as assessors with a view to issuing a credential will need to be linked to a Registered Training Organisation. It is the responsibility of that organisation to ensure that assessors are competent to perform this function. Whatever arrangements are put in place, people performing the assessment function must be able to conduct assessments that produce quality outcomes – against the endorsed standards! The following guidelines outline the minimum requirements of the industry for quality assurance in assessment services.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

18

The quality assurance framework agreed by the Ministers for Vocational Education and Training provides the basis for agreement on qualifications to be held by assessors. The industry suggests that • Assessors undertaking assessments on behalf of a Registered Training Organisation be required to produce evidence of their experience and competence in the field in which they are assessing • Assessors be deemed competent against relevant units in the national industry standards • Assessors conducting assessments in the Asset Maintenance Sector are able to be

formally recognised as workplace assessors against the endorsed national Workplace Assessor standards.

Between the persons conducting assessments against the Asset Maintenance Training Package they must hold the following competencies for assessors contained in the Training Package for Assessment and Workplace Training: • BSZ401A Plan Assessment • BSZ402A Conduct Assessment, and • BSZ403A Review Assessment Which are deemed equivalent to the units: • Conduct Assessment in Accordance with an Established Assessment Procedure • Extension Unit: Plan and Review Assessment From the former and Workplace Trainer competency standards endorsed by the National Training Board, but now superseded by the Training Package for Assessment and Workplace Training. To meet ARF requirements, qualified assessors should complete a professional development course in the use of the Asset Maintenance training packages, including interpretation of the standards for assessment purposes. 5.1 Assessment panels As an interim measure, the industry recommends the use of assessment panels. Such panels could be made up of a competent workplace assessor (who may not be competent in either individual units or against the endorsed industry standard being used for assessment) and a competent operator (who is recognised as competent against the unit/standards being used for assessment but is not a recognised, competent assessor). People on these panels should, in combination, be able to provide the full range of knowledge, skill and experience to deliver a reliable and valid assessment. Where feasible, an experienced person should be assigned as a mentor to assist candidates in the collection and preparation of evidence required for presentation during formal assessments.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

19

6. GUIDELINES FOR DESIGNING ASSESSMENT RESOURCES Assessment resources serve three functions they provide guidance to the assessor in structuring assessments They double as a self-paced learning package to help pro-active learning They guide the learning process and assist in the collection of evidence to demonstrate

competency. The non-endorsable components of this training package include assessment instruments and guides for trainers and assessors to use in planning and undertaking assessment. These instruments and guides have been developed and validated across Australia with the close cooperation of industry. The methodologies used to develop these resources provide a model for others wishing to develop their own resources. Consequently the following information is provided as guidance for RTOs developing their own instruments. Assessors wishing to develop and use their own assessment instruments need to ensure that the products and/or tools developed • are based on a correct interpretation of the standards, including performance criteria and

evidence guides • utilise evidence gathering methods that are gender and culturally inclusive and take into

account language, literacy and numeracy skills • are realistic, cost effective and that assessments can be undertaken safely and without

damage to the environment • utilise, insofar as is possible, resources available in the workplace which relate to the job

or function described in the standard. For example, resources may include access to enterprise policies, procedures and manufacturer’s instructions in the use, cleaning and storage of equipment.

RTOs and Assessors may wish to develop their own assessment resources and use these in training and assessment services that result in a qualification accepted in the Asset Maintenance industry. Where this option is selected, providers are provided with the following guidance on factors to consider ⇒ The direct involvement of industry and enterprise end-users in the development

process. Qualifications included in this package were developed with the assistance of industry stakeholders and reflect current and emerging vocational (performance) requirements in the workplace. The needs of the workplace must be considered if assessment instruments are to provide reliable and valid academic and work outcomes - within the qualifications framework in which endorsed industry standards are located. Workplace trials are an essential component of valid development of assessment instruments. ⇒ A validation of the material. Validation of instruments developed for use in assessments leading to national qualifications in this package should include input from industry and enterprise end-users likely to be affected by the assessment instruments. PSTA recommends that RTOs validate assessment instruments with industry.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

20

Validation should, where possible, include evaluation of the materials through workplace based trials. Validation trials should also ensure that the assessment material is reliable and able to produce valid and consistent outcomes consistent with the outcomes described in the standards. ⇒ An agreed process of review to ensure the valid and reliable use of the assessment

resources This may include assessment audits or other forms of appraisal designed to evaluate the consistency of assessment outcomes achieved through the use of the instruments. The Quality procedures to be implemented at the State and Territory level through State Recognition Agencies are designed to ensure quality outcomes in this regard.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

21

7. GUIDELINES FOR CONDUCTING ASSESSMENTS The following principles provide a guide to conducting assessments in the sectors covered by this package: Registered Training Organisations (RTOs) are responsible for the quality of assessment

and certification of assessment outcomes. RTOs should ensure that procedures are equitable, assessable, transparent and deliver consistency.

Assessment and recognition procedures should be valid and reliable.

English language should only be assessed where it is required for occupational,

education and training, public health or safety reasons. Where fluency in the use of English as a language is assessed for employment purposes, assessment should be in terms of functional literacy.

Applicants should be informed of all requirements and processes relating to assessment

and recognition – in advance of the assessment event. On completion of assessment or recognition procedures, applicants should be provided

with an objective, written statement explaining the result. Opportunities for appeal or review of assessment should be a condition of registration of

providers. Information on appeals processes should be provided by an RTO to its client(s) and be

explained and understood by the client before assessments are undertaken. Assessment can be undertaken in a variety of ways, for example against learning outcomes – formative assessment. This type of assessment is usually

supervised by an experienced/competent trainer/assessor and is directly related to a structured course of study. Further on-the-job assessment may be required before competency is recognised. Where assessment on-the-job is not possible, perhaps because the functions described in the standards are not a normal part of the individual’s current job, arrangements for job rotation or simulated learning may be required.

Against competency standards – summative assessment. This type of assessment is

undertaken on completion of a structured course which includes work experience. The assessment is conducted by a person who has not been directly involved in the learning process. The assessment integrates assessment against learning outcomes with assessment of performance against endorsed standards.

In the workplace alone, assessment may be undertaken against competency standards

as part of ongoing assessment or self-paced assessment. It may be that not all assessment will involve observation of performance. In some cases, competency may be able to be inferred from evidence derived from current or past work experience. In other cases, the competencies required may be beyond those that can be routinely demonstrated within an individual’s job, and flexible assessment opportunities such as job rotation may be required.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

22

7.1 Planning assessments A key feature of the new system is the need to balance quality and quantity of training and assessment. Quantity The quantity of training required for a candidate to achieve an outcome at either the unit or qualification level is addressed through the preliminary evaluation of a candidate’s current competency. This evaluation may be undertaken by the candidate, or the candidate in association with a supervisor or workplace mentor. It does not constitute a formal assessment or performance appraisal, but rather is used to identify existing knowledge and skill levels in relation to the candidate’s job function and current or future career path. The information derived from self-assessment is useful insofar as it allows an accurate, relevant and reliable training and assessment plan to be negotiated with the employer and RTO. Once agreement has been reached on the candidate’s level of current competency, and individual training plan can be organised and implemented. This approach makes training more relevant to the person being trained – and more cost-effective to employers. Quality Assessment serves a second, important purpose in the model adopted by the industry. It allows quality (i.e. relevance to the end-user) of training outcomes to be evaluated. This is achieved by being able to correlate time, effort and resources required for training and assessment with evidence of performance outcomes. By linking assessment directly to outcomes described in standards, people affected by the process have an opportunity to evaluate the quality of training services provided against accepted criteria for evaluating performance on the job. The process brings training, assessment and recognition into line with relevant individual, industry and enterprise performance needs. 7.1.1. Selection of units (career planning) The model adopted by the industry avoids the use of co- and pre-requisite groupings of units. The selection of units for assessment and the sequencing of training and assessments, especially where these form part of a formal course of study, are matters which need to be carefully negotiated with the RTO at an enterprise level. In this case, assessors need to take the industry packaging advice in the Qualifications section of these guidelines into account. Units defined as ‘core’ units provide common ground across the industry for training, assessment and recognition activities. Elective units take into account individual or enterprise variations and requirements and provide for flexibility in course design, delivery and assessment.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

23

Various combinations of core and elective units may be required depending on the particular occupational or service niche occupied by the candidate. Information on these aspects of the industry are explained in the standards and in career planning resources in the training package. 7.1.2. Assessment of underpinning knowledge and skill In the context of occupational competence, knowledge, understanding and associated cognitive skills are part of performance, not something apart from it. While evidence of knowledge and understanding can be collected or inferred from formal written or oral tests, these are not the only ways of generating such evidence. Nor are they necessarily the most appropriate ways of checking the acquisition of knowledge and skill. Knowledge is about understanding what should be done, how and perhaps where and when it should be done – and what should be done if circumstances change. Evidence of knowledge and understanding may be drawn from performance, for example through: Observing an activity Examining products and outcomes of activity Reviewing third party testimony Looking at written or visual records Questioning candidates in relation to specific tasks and more broadly about principles or

consequences of various actions. Sensible approaches to assessment are likely to use a balance of performance and knowledge evidence in arriving at a decision about an individual’s current competence. How this evidence is collected and assessed will need to be sufficiently cost-effective to fit within agreed funding formulas, but sufficiently rigorous to ensure that assessment records are valid, reliable and have currency in the (whole) education system. 7.1.3. Frequency of Assessments Formal assessment of competency should occur when the candidate is fully ready for such assessment. Reaching a decision on readiness and frequency of assessment is a matter for negotiation between the candidate, the RTO, employer and other relevant parties to the training and assessment contract. Some parties might agree on a form of continuous on-the-job performance appraisal culminating in regularly sequenced assessments against groups of units; others may prefer assessments against individual units at pre-agreed times; others may wish to consider variations on this approach. 7.1.4. Evidence of competency The system devised by the industry provides a series of signposts to help in the collection of evidence for assessment purposes. Assessment record books enable the recording of assessments and assessment outcomes. The record books - and associated portfolios of information - will provide evidence of competency to support a candidate’s claim for recognition by way of either a Statement of Attainment, or a qualification at a given level of the AQF The industry has not considered a formal skills passport and will, for the foreseeable future, rely on assessment record books and credentials issued by RTO’s as evidence of competency.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

24

7.2 Factors to consider in planning Assessments • Within a structured program of training, e.g. New Traineeships the options available to

trainees undertaking assessments as part of a New Traineeship may be defined by the contract of employment/learning

• Career path options leading to industry recognised qualifications may be restricted by

Regulations administered by a second Government Agency. In most jurisdictions licensing or regulatory arrangements which restrict entry to employment are under review. The extent to which Regulations impact on entry-level training may vary between States. Assessors should consider local as well as national requirements when assessing underpinning knowledge.

• Extent of integration of on and off the job training and the quality of curricula.

Some providers continue to offer curriculum based courses which focus on off-the-job training. In this case, special arrangements will need to be negotiated to ensure an integration of off-the-job learning and relevant work experience in order to provide a relevant and accurate assessment of competency.

• The use of simulated work environments is acceptable. However, such environments

should replicate to the greatest extent possible the variety of factors which affect performance. Assessment of competency in simulated work environments should ensure that the four components of competency, including the ability to deal with contingencies and to transfer competence from one work environment to another, is addressed.

• Quality and the extent of workplace supervision required. Poor or inconsistent

supervision in the workplace may have an adverse effect on performance. Planning of assessments needs to ensure that relevant quality auditing and supervision support is guaranteed in advance of assessments being done. Where necessary, external support services and monitoring may need to be arranged.

• Mechanisms for resolving disputes in relation to the employment/training/assessment

contract need to be clearly discussed and agreed with all relevant parties as part of the planning process. The assessment process provides an opportunity for the effectiveness of training/assessment to be evaluated. This opportunity should be considered as part of the planning and evaluation process.

• Functional levels of language and literacy required to actually do the job. 7.2.1. Work-based assessment of trainees who are not enterprise employees The trainee-as-student refers to the situation where a full-time or part-time student is undertaking vocational placement as an integral part of their program of study. In this situation, issues which need to be addressed include: • length of work placement • existence of a structured training plan which integrates the work placement with the

student’s study program • formal statement of the student and employer expectations of outcomes from the work

placement. • insurance and protection of the learner while on work placement • feedback on the value of the placement in relation to the expectations of the parties who

negotiated the placement. • In regulated areas, direct supervision may need to be provided by authorised personnel


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

25

7.2.2. Work-based assessment of trainees who are employees of Group Training

Companies. Trainees employed by Group Training Companies undertake work as part of their overall course of study. Issues which need to be addressed in planning assessments include: • length of work placement and opportunities for rotation in employment and assessment • existence of a structured training plan which integrates the work placement with the

trainees study program • formal statement of the trainee and employer expectations of outcomes from the work

placement and associated assessment activities • insurance and protection of the trainee while on work placement and undergoing

assessment • feedback on the value of the placement in relation to the expectations of the parties who

negotiated the placement and are parties to the assessment process • In regulated areas, direct supervision may need to be provided by authorised personnel 7.2.3. Industry Regulation People employed in providing services described in these standards are exposed to levels of risk which can be minimised through training and protective strategies. Training in the industry is not presently mandated by law - other than in the area of occupational health and safety. However, regulation of industry activities occurs in a variety of ways, including business licensing, tickets to work in highly hazardous areas and licensing controls over access to and use of certain chemicals. In some cases, the handling, storage and transport of prescribed waste materials is also regulated.

7.2.4. Other factors

Other factors which are equally important for consideration in planning and conducting assessments have to do with general work practices and industry structure, including • Non-traditional working hours • Work is generally performed on a client’s premises • The traditional training infrastructure is being replaced with one which will support skill

development and national recognition • There is a learning culture at work in the industry, involving the direct transfer of custom

and practice between peers working in teams • The industry is largely made up of small enterprises, although the service market is driven

by global enterprises • Overall organisation and leadership in the industry stems from large enterprises and peak

industry associations • The industry is essentially a service industry with a strong emphasis on customer relations


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

27

8. SOURCES OF INFORMATION ON ASSESSMENT This section provides a list of resources and organisations relevant to assessors in both institutional and workplace contexts The resource list includes both general assessment and industry specific assessment resources 8.1. General assessment Reference texts: Updated Guidelines for Training package Developers. ANTA. March 1998. Case Studies of Action Learning Groups Vol 3 & 4 (Flexible Delivery National Staff Development Committee). National Staff Development Committee. ANTA. Melbourne. 1996. A Guide to Mentoring: A Guide to Support the Work Based Learning in Action Scheme. National Staff Development Committee. ANTA. Melbourne. 1996. Assessment: Technical Manual. Dept of Employment, Education and Training> AGPS. Canberra. 1994 Assessment: System Design. Dept of Employment, Education and Training> AGPS. Canberra. 1994 Assessors and Workplace Trainers. Assessors Competency Standards. 1998 Black. H Sufficiency of Evidence, in Competency and Assessment Issue 20, pp3-10. Standards Methodology Branch. Employment Department. U.K. 1993. Courtney, M. Mawer, G. Integrating English, Literacy and Numeracy into Vocational Education and Training: A framework. Dept of Employment, Education, Training and Youth Affairs. Fletcher, S NVQs Standards and Competence: a practical guide for employers, managers and trainers (Kogan Page). London. 1991. Fletcher, S. Competence-based assessment techniques. (Kogan Page) London U.K. 1992.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

28

8.2. Practical Resources The following resources have been developed by Property Services Training Australia (Property Services Industry Training Advisory Body) in association with peak industry Associations and leading enterprises. Guide to Training in the following industry sectors Asset Development and Management

Asset Maintenance Security and Investigative Services

Guide to Assessment in the following industry sectors Asset Development and Management


Career planning in Asset Development and Management


Assessment instruments developed against the following standards Real Estate Agency Property Development and Operations Pest Management Contract Cleaning Services Security (Guards) Security Control room Operations Access Security Security management Investigative Services Security Risk Management Assessment Record books for Real Estate Agency Property Development and Operations Pest Management Contract Cleaning Services Security (Guards) Security Control room Operations Access Security Security management Investigative Services Security risk management Professional Development Materials (Resource kit for assessors using the standards for training/assessment purposes)


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

29

8.3 Sources of Information and Assistance Information and advice on assessment against the standards in this package, or the use of materials described in 8.2 may be obtained through Property Services Training Australia Suite 8 Southern Cross House 9 McKay Street TURNER ACT 2612 Ph: 02 6257 8800 Fax: 02 6257 8801 e-mail: [email protected] or, Property Services Training Company Suite 2B Ground floor 187 Thomas Street HAYMARKET NSW 2000 Ph: 02 9212 1355 Fax: 02 9212 1296


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

31

SECTION 2

QUALIFICATIONS 1. INTRODUCTION Competency standards included in the endorsed component of this training package have been aligned to the Australian Qualifications Framework (AQF). The framework, which is outlined below, comprises 12 qualifications issued by three educational sectors. Qualifications which can be attained through the Asset Maintenance Recognition Framework, are shown below Schools Vocational education and

training (VET) Higher Education

Graduate Certificate Bachelor Degree Advanced Diploma Advanced Diploma Diploma Diploma Certificate iv Certificate iii Certificate ii Certificate ii Senior secondary certificate Certificate I Note: Statements of Attainment may be awarded against individual UNITS of competency and carry credit towards the achievement of a qualification at a higher or lower level of the AQF. A qualification is certification given in recognition of a candidate’s successful demonstration of competence against a defined set of competency standards which relate to the Australian Qualifications Framework (AQF). Units of competency provide the building blocks or structure to support recognition by way of a qualification located in the AQF. Various combinations of competency units are aligned to the AQF to support a qualification at various levels of the AQF. The qualifications in this framework are ‘nested’ insofar as each qualification has a relationship with packages of units aligned at other levels of the framework. The approach recognises that candidates competency based career progression may develop in a variety of ways. For some it may be by way of a course leading to a qualification at a ‘higher level’. For others it may be through work-place experience with competency defined against individual units of competency which are accumulated to the point where a qualification may be sought. For others it may be through a ‘bottom-up’ progression involving combinations of training and experience. 1.2. Packaging advice The aim of combining units of competency into groups acceptable to the industry and to VET providers, is to ensure a crucial link in the quality of education and training and work outcomes. Vocational qualifications need to have a relationship with the performance standards of the industry. Without this relationship, qualifications lack meaning in terms of


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

32

indicating what the holder of the credential can actually do in relation to industry requirements. A unit is also the minimum recording level in the formal VET system and provides the basis for credit transfer between competency-based courses and between sectors delivering different qualifications in the AQF. 1.2.1. Core and Elective units The standards in this training package are aligned to qualifications in various combinations of core and elective units. The combinations have been carefully selected to support multiple entry and exit points as well as flexible delivery of VET. It is essential, therefore, that Registered Training Organisations take the industry’s packaging and alignment advice into consideration when designing learning and assessment opportunities. As indicated above, the industry’s advice is predicated on the notion that units of competency provide the basis for credit transfer, credit accumulation and articulation or advanced standing from one credential to another, irrespective of the educational sector delivering the credential. The achievement of a single unit of competency aligned to multiple levels in the AQF means that the unit is assessed once only, and recognition of competency achieved against that unit is carried forward as credit towards the achievement of a qualification at any level in which the unit appears. 1.2.2 Units located at more than one level Qualifications aligned to the AQF assume that differences between qualification levels occur because of increasing levels of complexity in the acquisition and application of knowledge and skill and greater autonomy in the application of competency in the workplace. This principle has been addressed through the packaging of competency units within nested qualifications. As an individual moves through the qualification framework, the selection of units at any level is governed by: • the groups of units available at that level • the selection of units available at that level compared with the individual’s current, past

and future career aspirations • current work performance requirements • recognised industry work structures This means that two individuals may enter the qualifications framework at different levels and exit at the same level. At either level, they would be subject to the package selection rules at the levels at which they enter the framework. However, if one or both moved to the same qualification level, they could conceivably emerge from the same qualification level with the same combination of core units, but a different combination of units and be eligible for the same qualification. As a minimum, irrespective of how each arrived at the exit point, both should have the same core units and a pre-requisite number of elective units drawn from the total basket of units available at the level at which they exit the framework.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

33

The use of core and elective units at more than one level generally allows for • the recognition of key functions within an industry or enterprise that are carried on across

and between levels • recognition of current competence (or prior learning) based on the achievement of the

unit • an articulation pathway between levels Units which are only available at certain levels provide for the broadening and deepening of the knowledge and skill component at the level at which the units are located. The key to competency is not in the individual unit, but in the selection and ‘batching’ of units for assessment purposes at an AQF level. Recognition can therefore be achieved in a variety of ways, including • against an individual unit which is carried forward as credit towards a qualification located

at another level of the AQF • by grouping or batching units and assessing against the group of units in order to

determine competency in relation to the requirements of the AQF level at which the units are located

• by using a qualification achieved at a lower level as collateral (credit) towards a

qualification located at a higher level. While a ‘higher level’ qualification may carry in it the seeds of a ‘lower level’ qualification, its value in relation to work and the AQF lies in the expression of the full range and complexity of knowledge, skill and performance required at the level in which it is located.

2. Customisation of (Standards and of) Qualifications Customisation is the process of adding detail. The titles, scope and content of the standards and of qualifications in this framework will result in industry-wide recognition of competence in employment in the industry. It is important, therefore that customisation be seen in the context of the wider implication of national recognition against endorsed competency standards. Industry advice on customisation is as follows • Employers want training and recognition outcomes which reflect enterprise investments

in training and employment • Employees (and students) want recognition which has currency in a broader labour

market, as well as in the employing enterprise These two sets of needs have been balanced in the design of the standards and on guidance on packaging and alignment of groups of units in the standards to qualification levels. The industry regards the content and scope of the standards to be sufficiently flexible to allow for enterprise and service variations in training design, delivery and in assessment – without requiring substantial change to the units themselves


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

34

2.1 Conditions giving rise to a demand for customisation The industry recognises that a demand for customisation might occur for the following reasons • A demand for traineeships in areas not yet covered by the standards in this package may

arise. • A unit in another training package better expressing the content of a work function

covered by a unit in one of the standards in this package. In this case, the second unit delivers the same outcome but, the language used is better understood (customised) in terms of the candidate’s work environment.

• A candidate’s range of work functions includes all core functions in this industry, but also

includes specialist functions (performed in other industries) but not included in this package.

• Generally, the work described in the unit is performed in an allied industry context eg.

cleaning or pest control in the rural industry; in community services; on mine sites; on construction sites, etc. The variable is the location in which work is performed rather than the nature of the work or the performance criteria which have to be demonstrated.

In each case, the situation can be addressed by combining units of competency in this package with units of competency in other endorsed industry packages. If the recombined units deliver the same outcome, the qualification level should stay the same, but the package of units within the qualification may be different from the original packaging advice. To ensure quality outcomes and avoid duplication of training/assessment effort, customisation of any qualification is governed by the following criteria • Each unit delivers a workplace outcome within a coherent industry recognition framework • The combination of unit outcomes provides the basis for a qualification at a level of the

AQF therefore • Core units may not be replaced or substituted • only elective units in any package of units may be replaced or substituted by other units

of competency • Only elective units which are not required for purposes of occupational/functional

regulation in the industry may be replaced

Note: In the Pest Management sector, the following units have been identified and agreed as providing the basis for a nationally uniform regulation Unit PRM PMO5 A Modify units to manage pests Unit PRM PM06 A Apply pesticide to manage pests Unit PRM PM018 A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

35

• Only a unit which delivers an equivalent outcome in the qualification structure, to the

elective unit which it replaces, may be used as a replacement unit • The replacement unit must not restrict the candidate’s access to further education or

employment opportunities in this industry • Training modules may not be substituted for endorsed units of competence All other variables should be able to be managed through customised training. There is no restriction on the use, by other industries and enterprises, of individual units (either core or elective) in endorsed standards covered by this package. It should be noted that State Quality Assurance processes associated with the Registration of Training Organisations require Training Organisations to show that training and assessment occur in accordance with the requirements of the training package qualification. 2.2 New Apprenticeships The industry qualifications framework creates opportunities for a variety of emerging career paths to be addressed. Traineeships are slowly being introduced to the industry. Traineeships are currently sector-specific. While the majority of New Apprenticeships (traineeships) will be located at Certificate levels II to IV, all qualification levels addressed in this package may potentially be used for the purpose of a traineeship. Qualifications issued as a result of the New Apprenticeship program should not be different to qualifications issued as a result of competency demonstrated through other recognition pathways available in the industry. The following section provides advice in relation to each of the sets of standards that currently support qualifications in • Cleaning operations • Cleaning supervision • Pest management • Pest management business operations


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

36

3. PACKAGING AND ALIGNMENT OF STANDARDS TO THE AQF

3.1 Contract Cleaning Services

There are three qualifications in the Contract Cleaning Sector. The qualifications have application in all cleaning activities irrespective of premises or location in which they are performed. As a result, the standards can be used in a variety of allied industry contexts. Special areas covered by regulation or legislation include OH&S, environmental protection and waste control and reflect national Codes of Practice in the industry.

OH&S is addressed through individual units of competency as well as in elements and performance criteria in all units across all levels. Knowledge and understanding of safe and healthy work practices, and the use and storage of cleaning agents, including chemicals, underpin all of the functional competencies. The core units in the qualifications framework are common across the industry and performed in all enterprises irrespective of size or specialisation. Core functions required for cleaners (Certificates II & III) include OH&S, the maintenance of hard and soft floors and glass surfaces, as well as furniture and fittings. Also included is the important area of sanitation, covering amenities areas and collection and disposal of waste. The Certificate IV for supervisors and others in similar operations management roles cover OH&S, training and safe and efficient organisation of human material and financial resources

3.2 Pest Management Qualifications in this sector cover AQF levels II to IV. The standards are based on a functional model and can be flexibly applied by enterprises. The use of electives in the qualifications supports flexibility and relevance in the application of the standards. Two functional streams are catered for in the standards: one in technical pest management and the other for business operations. The two streams run in parallel at Certificate II and Certificate III level but merge at Certificate IV level. For competency recognition at AQF level IV, candidates need to have demonstrated competence in all core units and elective units at the required level for both the technical and business operations path. OH&S is built into each unit to ensure the focus on safe, efficient operations is maintained. Units also cover relationships with clients, business operations and training. Specialist technical areas of timber pests and fumigation are addressed as electives to allow candidates to select these areas when relevant to their particular work needs. Units to do with the application of pesticide and fumigation have relevance in state and territory regulation. Their use as separate units within regulatory arrangements varies from state to state.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

37

3.3 Details of Qualifications 3.3.1 Cleaning Operations PRM20198 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Cleaning Operations) To achieve Certificate II, the candidate for recognition must have demonstrated competence

against all 3 specified core units, and at least 7 of the elective units available at this level.

Core Units

PRMCL33A Plan for safe and efficient cleaning activities

PRMCL34A Follow relevant OH&S policies and procedures to ensure own safety and that of others

PRMCL35 A Maintain a cleaning storage area

Elective Units

PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surfaces

PRMCL02A Restore hard floor finish

PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor

PRMCL05A Remove stains and spillages from soft floors

PRMCL08A Bonnet buff soft floor to achieve a clean surface appearance

PRMCL09A Wash and squeegee glass surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime

PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings

PRMCL11A Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks

PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime

PRMCL13A Undertake detail clean of window coverings to remove all dirt and grime

PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room

PRMCL16A Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime

PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition

PRMCL19A Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area

PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

38

Title: PRM30198 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Cleaning Operations) To achieve recognition at Certificate III, the candidate for recognition must

demonstrate competency in all core units and at least 15 of the elective units listed below, including at least 7 units from Elective Group A and at least 8 units from Elective Group B.

Core Unit

PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work



PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area

Elective Units Group A

PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surfaces

PRMCL02A Restore hard floor finish

PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor

PRMCL05A Remove stains and spillages from soft floors



PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings

PRMCL11A Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks

PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime

PRMCL13A Undertake detail clean of window coverings to remove all dirt and grime

PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room

PRMCL16A Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime

PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition

PRMCL19A Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area

PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition

Elective Units Group B

PRMCL03A Replace hard floor finish

PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

39

PRMCL07A Remove dirt and soil from soft floors or fabric upholstery using a water extraction method

PRMCL14A Maintain a clean room environment with no traces of visible dust

PRMCL18A Clean a unit or location to achieve a low bacteria condition

PRMCL20A Undertake pressure wash to remove excessive or oil based soil

PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource effectiveness

PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient workflow

PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace

PRMCL36A Carry out high level cleaning

BSX0008/01 Prepare for Training (Category 1 Workplace Trainer)

BSX0008/02 Deliver Training (Category 1 Workplace Trainer)

BSX0008/03 Review Training (Category 1 Workplace Trainer)


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

40

Title PRM40198 Certificate IV in Asset Maintenance (Cleaning Operations

Management) To achieve recognition at this level, the candidate must have demonstrated

competence in all core units at this level

Core Units

PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource effectiveness

PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships

PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient work flow

PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications

PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships

PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work

PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace

PRMCL32A Recruit and appoint staff to meet work requirements


PRMCL34A Follow relevant OHS policies and procedures to ensure own safety and that of others

PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area





Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

41

4.2 Pest Management Title PRM20298 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management -

Technical) To achieve recognition at Certificate II level, the candidate must have demonstrated

competency against all 5 specified core units.

Core Units

PRMPM01A Respond to customer inquiry

PRMPM05A Modify environment to manage pests

PRMPM06A Apply pesticides to manage pests

PRMPM09A Inform and educate clients on pest management

PRMPM18A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

42

Title PRM20398 Certificate II in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management –

Busines Operations)

For recognition at this level, the candidate must have demonstrated competency against the specified core unit plus 4 of the elective units at this level.

Core Unit


Elective Units


PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations

PRMPM30A Maintain financial records

PRMPM31A Process accounts receivable and payable

PRMPM32A Maintain a cash receipting system

PRMPM33A Maintain credit control

PRMPM36A Process payroll


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

43

Title PRM30298 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management –

Technical) For recognition at Certificate III level, the candidate must have demonstrated

competence against all core units and at least 1 elective unit from the list provided Core Units


PRMPM02A Assess pest management options

PRMPM03A Provide quotation

PRMPM04A Prepare and present a submission for pest management program



PRMPM07A Establish and monitor a preventative pest management program


PRMPM16A Resolve client’s pest management problems

PRMPM17A Repair and maintain service equipment


PRMPM28A Select, set up and control a pest management vehicle

Elective Units

PRMPM08A Inspect and report on timber pests

PRMPM10A Control timber pests

PRMPM11A Eradicate pests through fumigation

PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials





Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

44

Title PRM30398 Certificate III in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management – Business Operations)

For recognition at this level, candidates must have demonstrated competency

against the core unit and at least 8 elective units from the list below.

Core Unit


Elective Units



PRMPM04A Prepare and present submission for pest management program

PRMPM16A Resolve clients’ pest management problems


PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials






Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

45

Title PRM40298 Certificate IV in Asset Maintenance (Pest Management) For recognition at Certificate IV level, the candidate must have demonstrated

competency in all core units and at least 7 electives from those listed at this level.

Core Units




PRMPM04A Prepare and present a submission for pest management program



PRMPM07A Establish and monitor a preventative pest management program


PRMPM15A Undertake process improvement to reduce costs and improve quality service

PRMPM16A Resolve clients’ pest management problems



PRMPM20A Supervise staff

PRMPM24A Prepare budgets


Elective Units

PRMPM21A Prepare a business plan

PRMPM22A Prepare, implement and review policy and procedures for company operations

PRMPM23A Develop and implement a marketing strategy

PRMPM25A Develop and implement a human resource plan

PRMPM27A Minimise business operation risks

PRMPM34A Manage cash flow

PRMPM35A Maintain asset management records and control


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

46

PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements

PRMPM38A Monitor and review staff performance


BSX0008/5 Deliver for Training (Category 2 Workplace Trainer)

PRMPM41A Assess Trainees

BSX0008/7 Review and Promote Training (Category 2 Workplace Trainer)


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

47

SECTION 3

THE COMPETENCY STANDARDS


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

48

UNIT INDEX CLEANING

Unit Code Unit Title Page No

PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surfaces 45

PRMCL02A Restore hard floor finish 49

PRMCL03A Replace hard floor finish 55

PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor 59

PRMCL05A Remove stains and spillages from soft floors 63

PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer 67


71

PRMCL08A Bonnet buff soft floor to achieve a clean surface appearance 75

PRMCL09A Wash and squeegee glass surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime 79

PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings 83

PRMCL11A Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks 87

PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime 91

PRMCL13A Undertake detail clean of window coverings to remove all dirt and grime 95

PRMCL14A Maintain a clean room environment with no traces of visible dust 99

PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room 103

PRMCL16A Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime 107

PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition 111

PRMCL18A Clean a unit or location to achieve a low bacteria condition 115

PRMCL19A Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area 121

PRMCL20A Undertake pressure wash to remove excessive or oil based soil 125

PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition 129

PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource effectiveness 133

PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships 137

PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient workflow 139


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

49

CLEANING (cont)

PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications 141

PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships 143

PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work 145

PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace 147

BSX0008/01 Prepare for Training (Category 1 Workplace Trainer) 151

BSX0008/02 Deliver Training (Category 1 Workplace Trainer) 155

BSX0008/03 Review Training (Category 1 Workplace Trainer) 159

PRMCL32A Recruit and appoint staff to meet work requirements 161

PRMCL33A Plan for safe and efficient cleaning activities 163


167

PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area 169

PRMCL36A Carry out high level cleaning 173


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

50

PEST MANAGEMENT Unit Code Unit Title Page

No

PRMPM01A Respond to customer inquiry 177

PRMPM02A Assess pest management options 179

PRMPM03A Provide quotation 185

PRMPM04A Prepare and present a submission for pest management program 189

PRMPM05A Modify environment to manage pests 193

PRMPM06A Apply pesticides to manage pests 199

PRMPM07A Establish and monitor a preventative pest management program 205

PRMPM08A Inspect and report on timber pests 209

PRMPM09A Inform and educate clients on pest management 213

PRMPM10A Control timber pests 217

PRMPM11A Eradicate pests through fumigation 223

BSX0008/1 Prepare for training 227

BSX0008/2 Deliver Training 231

BSX0008/3 Review Training 235

PRMPM15A Undertake process improvement to reduce costs and improve quality service 237

PRMPM16A Resolve client’s pest management problems 241

PRMPM17A Repair and maintain service equipment 245

PRMPM18A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area 249

PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations 253

PRMPM20A Supervise staff 257

PRMPM21A Prepare a business plan 261

PRMPM22A Prepare, implement and review policy and procedures for company operations 265

PRMPM23A Develop and implement a marketing strategy 269

PRMPM24A Prepare budgets 273

PRMPM25A Develop and implement a human resource plan 277

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials 281

PRMPM27A Minimise business operation risks 285


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

51

PEST MANAGEMENT (cont) PRMPM28A Select, set up and control a pest management vehicle 289

PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations 293

PRMPM30A Maintain financial records 295

PRMPM31A Process accounts receivable and payable 297

PRMPM32A Maintain a cash receipting system 301

PRMPM33A Maintain credit control 303

PRMPM34A Manage cash flow 305

PRMPM35A Maintain asset management records and control 307

PRMPM36A Process payroll 309

PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements 313

PRMPM38A Monitor and review staff performance 315

BSX0008/4 Prepare for Training 319

BSX0008/5 Deliver Training 323

PRMPM41A Assess trainees 327

BSX0008/7 Review & Promote Training 331

PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surfaces.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

53

STREAM Asset Maintenance

FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surfaces.

This unit covers both manual and mechanical methods applied to hard floor maintenance at any frequency of application or location.

The elements comprising this unit of competence are not necessarily sequential. The sequence will depend upon the context in which they are applied.

ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 1 Identify type and condition of hard floor, soil

type and size of area to be maintained 1 Floor type and surface texture is

identified so that suitable maintenance equipment can be selected

2 The size and usage pattern of the area is identified so that the equipment and work planning produces the most efficient result

3 Soil and litter types are recognised from observation so that equipment selection is appropriate

4 Any pre-existing damage to work site is reported immediately

2 Select and set up equipment 1 Equipment is selected to ensure type and style is suitable for surface to be maintained

2 All equipment is checked to be in a clean and safe working condition prior to usage

3 Mechanical equipment is checked for safe operation and is set up to manufacturers’ specifications and adjusted to suit operator

4 Where required, suitable cleaning agents are selected and prepared in accordance with manufacturers’ and relevant occupational health and safety requirements

5 Protective clothing suitable for conditions is selected

3 Set up area 1 Furniture and fittings that will disrupt clear access to the floor area are moved without damage in accordance with client requirements

2 Where appropriate, adequate ventilation is provided to the work site to reduce wet application drying time



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

54

3 Where required, work site is barricaded and appropriate signs installed to reduce safety hazards during floor maintenance activities

4 The need for assistance is identified and obtained where required

4 Sweep surface where waste needs to be collected

1 The amount of rising dust and waste spread is kept to a minimum

2 All waste is gathered and removed from the work area

3 A posture appropriate to the conditions and equipment selected is adopted that minimises potential for strain and injury

4 All mechanical equipment is used in accordance with relevant safety and manufacturers’ specifications

5 All waste is gathered in an area that will not disrupt ongoing client activity

5 Apply dust mop to surface where removal of fine dust is required

1 Where applicable, dust mop is applied in direction of surface grain to reduce potential for surface damage

2 Dust mop head is regularly agitated to ensure fibre remains uncompressed and will continue to attract dust

3 Surface is checked to ensure it is dry prior to application to avoid streaking and damage to mop head

4 Walk over of gathered dust is minimised to avoid surface damage

5 No surface dust or waste is visible on completion of dust mopping

6 Apply damp mop to floor surface where removal of adhered soil is required

1 Walk over of wet areas is minimised

2 Mop application is regulated to ensure correct cleaning agent dilution and application occurs in accordance with manufacturers specifications

3 All surface cleaning agent is removed from the surface as soon as possible to ensure surface is left dry and is free of streaks and stains

4 Mop head is regularly rinsed and replaced where necessary to avoid buildup and reapplication of soil to floor surface



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

55

7 Buff hard floor where required to improve appearance

1 All machinery is operated safely in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

2 Buffing application results in even surface appearance

3 A posture suitable for buffing operations that minimises potential for injury to operator is adopted

4 Machine is kept under control to avoid run off

5 Dust mop is used to remove any residue left by buffing

8 Dispose of collected waste 1 All waste and cleaning solution is disposed of in accordance with relevant company, client, environmental and local government regulations

9 Clean and store equipment 1 Equipment is cleaned as per manufacturers’ specifications

2 Cleaning agents, polishes and used/dirty cloths are stored in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant health and safety requirements

3 Cleaned equipment is stored in a manner that will maintain its function and is readily accessible for re-use

RANGE OF VARIABLES Floor types include: concrete, terrazzo, vinyl, slate, ceramic tile, wood, marble, brick, parquetry, rubber, polished wood Waste may be wet or dry, dust, paper, food, stones, gravel, industrial, hospital waste Equipment may include: brooms; dust pan and brush; mechanical sweepers; air blowers; water hoses; hospital mop split mop; mopping system (servo); bucket Mechanical equipment such as an auto sweeper or air blower is used in large surface areas, industrial or open public areas. Air blowers are used in areas auto sweepers cannot access. In some cases, water is hosed to achieve the same result Mechanical equipment can be gas; electric; battery; or petrol powered Broom types include: yard; bassine; PVC; household; union fibre; deck fibre; millet; banister set Dust mops are either straight or scissored and are known as 'modacrylic dust fringe mops'. Some applications require the dust mop to be impregnated with a dust control solution



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

56

Damp mops are usually made from poly cotton or 100% cotton with either ragged or fixed shape. Mop buckets are fitted with a ringer and may have castors Relevant safety regulations are determined from State and Federal legislation; industry and company codes of practice Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance referenced by such legislation Manufacturers specifications and safety data are pre-printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of hard floors and characteristic finishes

Product knowledge, including knowledge of range of cleaning materials and equipment Effect of pre-existing conditions on: Safe work practices Job or client specifications Hierarchies of hazard control

Buffing techniques Chemical handling and disposal techniques Manual handling techniques Reporting and recording information Planning and organising work Communication with others

Units PRM CL01 and PRM CL02 may be assessed in combination with each other. Assessment of evidence should establish the individual’s ability to perform the job to the standard required in the workplace. Assessment of competency should be achieved through a practical demonstration involving two or more surface types and varying surface areas.

Evidence of competency may be obtained from observation of the following: identification of relevant cleaning issues planning and organising work to deal with the cleaning issue using safe sorting and handling of solid and liquid wastes generated by the job demonstration of different techniques required for different, specified floor surfaces

Evidence of underpinning knowledge may be obtained from oral questioning about safe work practices and quality assurance procedures Other forms of evidence may include job reports, supervisor reports and client survey responses Resources Required for Assessment Copies of relevant standards, training books and assessment planning guides Accident report forms Job specifications and reporting forms A range of chemicals and equipment, including personal protective equipment A suitable venue, including access to at least 2 different hard floor surfaces Material safety data sheets and equipment operating manuals

PRMCL02A – Restore hard floor finish


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

57


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL02A Restore hard floor finish

This unit applies to both mechanical or manual methods for floor surface restoration.

ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

1 Identify floor type, texture, condition and

restore method 1 Floor type is accurately recognised

from observation and reference to contract specification

2 Surface texture is identified so that suitable restoration methods can be selected

3 Nature of embedded soil is identified to ensure removal methods are appropriate

4 The most suitable method to restore floor condition is selected

2 Select and set up equipment 1 Equipment is selected to ensure type is suitable for surface to be restored

2 Required pads and brushes are selected suitable for finish type and condition without damage to floor surface

3 The accessibility for mechanical equipment is determined

4 Suitable cleaning agents are selected and prepared in accordance with relevant safety and manufacturers requirements

5 All equipment is checked for safe operation and is set up in accordance with manufacturers specifications

6 Protective clothing is worn correctly prior to commencing work

3 Set up site 1 Site, availability and time are confirmed with client in advance

2 Items to be removed and/or relocated are identified to ensure clear access to floor is obtained

3 Where necessary, furniture and fittings are removed and/or relocated in a safe manner without damage



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

58


5 Where required, work site is barricaded and appropriate signs installed to reduce safety hazards during floor maintenance activities

6 Adequate ventilation for work area is provided so that chemical build up in air is reduced and floor dries quickly

7 Floor is swept to remove all loose litter and dust

4 Scrub floor where embedded soil is to be removed

1 Cleaning solution is applied and agitated to release soil from surface

2 Cleaning solutions are applied in a safe manner in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

3 Solution application is contained on the floor area being restored

4 Correct posture for equipment type is maintained to minimise risk of injury

5 Equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions

6 All visible surfaces are free from soil on completion of scrubbing activity

7 Floor is rinsed free from streaks, spots or dried cleaning solution






5 No surface dust or litter is visible on completion of dust mopping

6 Polish or spray buff surface where required to restore appearance and condition

1 Floor surface is prepared free from loose soil and spots prior to spray buffing

2 Emulsifier spray is applied immediately prior to application of buffing equipment

3 Buffing results in a smooth dust free finish that reflects light evenly



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

59

4 Equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

7 Restore work area to original layout 1 All moved items are returned to original position when floor restoration is complete in accordance with client instructions




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Scope of application: This unit applies where scrubbing, polishing or spray buffing may be required to restore an existing hard floor surface. Where the surface is to be removed and replaced with a new one (commonly known as ‘strip and seal’), the applicable unit is ‘Replace hard floor finish’. Embedded soil may include: heavy dirt build up; tar; grease; paint; food; oil etc. SCRUBBING Scrubbing can be applied to non-polished floor surfaces or as part of the preparation for resealing a coated floor Non-polished floors may include: concrete; stone; ceramic; glazed tile; brick Coated floors include: polished stone; marble; terrazzo; vinyl; timber; parquetry; linoleum Routine scrubbing involves the application of a light cleaning agent where the application, agitation, pickup and rinse is a single activity Scrubbing can be undertaken with either bristle scrubbing broom or using pads with mechanical scrubber Bristle types include: stiff nylon; tynex (for concrete); abrasive pads



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

60

Mechanical scrubbers may use either rotary brushes for large flat surfaces or vertical drum scrubbers where indentations need to be scrubbed Mechanical equipment can be either electrical; gas or battery powered 'Auto scrubbing' involves the use of heavy duty machines for large areas (industrial, public spaces) where the cleaning agent application, scrubbing and solution pickup is automatic Scrubbing pads for machine application are colour coded by manufacturers for the level of abrasive action Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or wall posters Relevant safety regulations are determined from State and Federal legislation; industry and company codes of practice Legislation includes: the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance referenced by such legislation Manufacturers specifications and safety data are pre printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of hard floors and characteristic finishes

Product knowledge, including knowledge of range of cleaning materials and equipment Effect of pre-existing conditions on: Safe work practices Job or client specifications Hierarchies of hazard control

Buffing techniques Chemical handling and disposal techniques Manual handling techniques Reporting and recording information Planning and organising work Communication with others

Units PRM CL01 and PRM CL02 may be assessed in combination with each other. Assessment may be by way of a single practical demonstration, preferably under work conditions. Evidence of competency should include consideration of the individual’s ability to apply underpinning knowledge and skill to other situations. This may mean that performance criteria are not assessed individually, but that performance is assessed across the full range of criteria, taking into account the variables listed above. It is recommended that candidates have the opportunity to undertake self-assessment before being formally assessed by either a supervisor or independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from observing the following: Planning and organising work to suit the requirements of the work environment Managing problems arising from the job requirements or work site Obtaining additional resources, if relevant



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

61

Evidence of underpinning knowledge may be obtained from discussions about safe work practices and reasons why a given technique was selected in preference to others. Evidence of understanding may include consideration of: Types of hard floor Product knowledge, including knowledge of range of cleaning agents, emulsifiers and equipment Preparation techniques Applications of cleaning agents and equipment operations Waste sorting, handling and disposal

Other forms of evidence may include written supervisor reports and client survey reports Resources Required for Assessment • A suitable venue • Relevant equipment and learning materials, products including a range of surface materials, cleaners and

sealants • Training record books, planners and relevant assessment instruments • Material safety data sheets • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Manufacturers specifications for equipment and materials • Job and client specifications

PRMCL03A Replace hard floor finish.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

63


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL03A Replace hard floor finish.

This unit covers the industry process commonly called 'strip and seal'.


1 Identify floor and finish requirements 1 Type of floor is accurately identified so that suitable sealant/finish and application method can be selected

2 Existing sealant/finish type is established to enable any new sealant/finish selected to bond effectively with floor surface

3 The level and pattern of area usage is established so that areas of high usage can be targeted during application

4 The required durability of the sealant/finish is established through reference to existing conditions and client requirements

2 Select and prepare equipment and sealant 1 Type of applicator is selected to suit floor and sealant/finish type

2 All equipment is checked to be in a safe and usable operating condition prior to use

3 All equipment and chemicals and sealants are prepared in a safe manner in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

3 Set up work area 1 Site, availability and time are confirmed with client in advance

2 Items to be removed and/or relocated are identified to ensure clear access to floor is obtained


4 The need for assistance is identified and obtained where required




Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

64

6 Adequate ventilation is provided to reduce chemical build up in area

7 Where required, work site is barricaded and appropriate signs installed to reduce safety hazards

4 Strip and prepare surface for sealant/finish 1 Surface is swept to remove all surface litter prior to commencing stripping

2 Surface is stripped with selected abrasive agent and selected chemical in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

3 All old sealant is removed to ensure effective application of new sealant

4 All loose soil and litter is thoroughly removed from the surface during stripping

5 Surface is rinsed and left in a neutral condition following stripping

6 Surface is mechanically pre-buffed with buffing pad designed to smooth surface consistent with level of lustre required from sealant and left in a dust free condition






5 No surface dust or litter is visible on completion of dust mopping

6 Apply sealant to floor 1 Sealant is applied evenly to all surface areas with selected applicator

2 Multiple coats of thin sealant are applied to achieve level of shine and durability required

3 Alternate coats of sealant are applied in an appropriate manner so that layers are cross linked

4 Appropriate safety clothing is worn in terms of relevant State and Federal regulation and manufacturers’ specifications



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

65




8 Restore floor to original condition 1 The need for assistance is identified and obtained where required

2 All moved items are returned to original position without damage to item or floor after sealant is completely dry

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Stripping involves the use of scrubbing equipment, usually mechanical, where heavy duty abrasive pads and chemicals are applied to remove all traces of old sealant Hand doodlebugs must be used in inaccessible areas and edges Wet pick-up may use mop and buckets (wet and dry vacuum or automatic scrubbers) Sealant and finish may be a combined product by the manufacturer Sealant/finish can be placed on all floors dependent on client requirements Sealant/finish can be placed on new floors or after scrubbing or stripping of old sealant Sealant/finish is applied with an applicator which can be: polycotton; lambswool; dust mop; foam roller; spray gun (rare) Floor rinsing is completed with segregated buckets and mops for stripper; sludge and clean rinse Floor rinsing may be done with automatic scrubbers Chemical sealers vary from: solvent; acrylic; polyurethane; water based; wax Sealant/finish is usually applied manually with applicator Suitability of sealant/finish for floor type is specified by manufacturer on sealant container Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

66

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of hard floors Product knowledge, including relevant cleaning equipment and materials, types of sealants & requirements for sealant application Methods for treating surface to achieve required outcome Enterprise safety procedures Client and job specifications Manufacturers’ specifications, including physical hazards associated with certain products

Planning and organising work Selection, operation and cleaning of suitable equipment Application of sealants Buffing techniques Work planning and site preparation Communication and problem solving Finding and using information Manual handling

Competency is to be demonstrated through a single, practical demonstration over the full range of performance criteria, to the standard required in the workplace. Evidence of consistency of outcomes over time may be obtained from supervisor reports and client satisfaction reports. All safety procedures and procedures involving the use of equipment and the use and disposal of chemicals must be strictly observed. Underpinning knowledge may be assessed through oral questions, supplemented where necessary by supervisor or mentor reports. Evidence of competency may include: • demonstrated ability to identify floor and sealant types • ability to determine suitable equipment, chemicals and sealant required to achieve the required surface

replacement • evidence of chemical and equipment safe handling procedures in relation to corrosive substances • attention to detail in producing the required lustre • job site preparation and cleanup techniques Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue • Job specification and reporting forms • A range of chemicals and equipment, including personal • Protective equipment • Material safety data sheets and equipment operating manuals • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

67


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor.

This unit applies to the maintenance of soft floors using either manual or mechanical methods within any frequency requirement.


1 Identify type and condition of soft floor 1 Soft floor type and soil types are

identified accurately


2 Determine method and prepare equipment 1 Suitable methods for the type and condition of soft floor are selected and tested where required

2 Equipment and tools are selected for conditions and are assembled in accordance with manufacturers’ and relevant health and safety requirements

3 All equipment is checked to be in safe operating condition to manufacturers’ specifications

3 Remove waste where required 1 Waste is assessed for possible health and safety hazards and appropriate avoidance and reporting action taken

2 Waste is identified accurately against any non-waste items located on floor

3 Collected waste is removed to a disposal point without delay or interruption to ongoing facility user activity

4 Offensive waste is removed promptly from the work area

4 Vacuum to remove any remaining waste where necessary

1 Vacuum manufacturers’ instructions are followed accurately

2 Selected tools are applied to maximise efficient use of equipment in removing dirt and soil

3 Removal and replacement of any furniture, merchandise or work in progress is carried out in accordance with client instructions

4 The need for stain or spot removal is identified so follow up action can be taken

5 Soil accumulation bags are emptied when full and hoses and filters kept free of obstruction during use

5 Rake or sweep soft surface to remove 1 Rake or broom is used to loosen



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

68

inground waste where required inground waste to meet client specification and/or soft floor conditions

2 Loosened waste is gathered into suitable piles to assist pickup




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Soft floors are: carpet; coir matting; synthetic carpet; rugs; mats; outdoor carpet; synthetic grass WASTE REMOVAL Waste may be removed by hand or using a scoop and brush designed for the purpose Waste receptacle may be carried garbage bag; bin; wheeled cleaners trolley Bulk waste requiring sweeping or raking may include: heavy encrusted soil or dirt; large buildup of soil in corners or on edges; excessive animal hair or fur; sawdust or other building debris Sweeping can be done prior to or in place of application of a vacuum machine to the soft floor by a mechanical push sweeper VACUUMING Vacuum machines include: floor based mobile systems; ducted systems; back mounted units; wet and dry systems; mechanical push sweepers Vacuum tools include: power heads; floor heads; variable pile height/adjustable heads; upholstery heads; crevice tool; brushes Common machine faults or operation problems may include: frayed cord; knots in cord; broken switches; unusual machine noises; vibration; electrical burn smells; broken plug; exposed wiring; blocked filters; use of electrical cords during wet vacuum operations Legislation includes: the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance referenced by such legislation



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

69

Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or on wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Customer requirements as per job specification Variation in techniques required for different types of floor Methods of recording and reporting on job outcomes Enterprise safety or security procedures relating to the job Manufacturer operating specifications for equipment used Hierarchy of hazard control

Work planning and organisation Manual handling Reporting and recording job outcomes Identification of different types of litter and waste Sorting and handling of different litter and waste types

Competence should be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria, taking the variables likely to affect performance into account. All safety procedures must be observed. Underpinning knowledge may be assessed through oral questions supplemented where necessary, by supervisor or referee reports.

Resources Required for Assessment

• A suitable venue with at least two different surfaces requiring treatment • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Training record books and relevant assessment instruments • Customer job specifications for each surface used in the assessment

PRMCL05A – Remove stains and spillages from soft floors


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

71


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL05A Remove stains and spillages from soft floors.


1 Identify type of spot or spillage 1 Soft floor type is identified accurately


3 Type of spot or spillage is identified

4 Uncertain identification is referred as appropriate for a second opinion

5 Identification is undertaken continuously

2 Determine remedial action 1 A knowledge of suitable removal methods is applied to determine the most efficient action to be taken

2 The current activities of the client are considered to minimise disruption to client activities

3 Apply chemical softening agent 1 The most effective chemical agent for the type of spot or spillage is applied in a safe manner to manufacturers’ and company requirements

2 Gloves and/or breathing masks are used in accordance with relevant health and safety requirements

3 Chemical agents are applied in sufficient quantities to soften spot without overspray

4 Remove foreign material 1 Spot or spillage is removed after the chemical has taken effect to loosen the soil

2 Removed soil is disposed of in accordance with relevant environmental, company and client requirements

5 Evaluate and report results 1 Cleaned spotted areas is compared with remaining surface to determine need for any further action

2 Evaluation results are reported to supervisor for further action or consultation with clients as required



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

72

RANGE OF VARIABLES Spotting may be done in conjunction with vacuuming; extraction; patrolling; other general cleaning activities Chemicals in use may include: liquids; foams; powders Chemicals may be applied using hand spray unit; rag; direct application Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or on wall posters Common types of spotting on soft floors include: coffee; cola; cordial; chewing gum; food; mud and dirt; grease; blood; human waste etc. The type of soft floor, tightness of weave and type of underlay may affect the type of chemicals and removal method adopted Spotting or spillage agents may be either wet or dry Legislation includes: the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance referenced by such legislation Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Methods of identifying stains Remedial techniques Stain removal procedures Product knowledge Enterprise safety procedures Client and job specifications Manufacturers’ specifications, including physical hazards associated with certain products

Analysis of stains Chemical selection and application techniques Communication and problem solving Work planning and site preparation Equipment operation and cleaning Reporting and recording of job outcomes Finding and using information

Competency is to be demonstrated on the job, over the full range of performance criteria in this unit. Multiple assessments (no more than two, involving two different surfaces and two different types of stains) to determine consistency of outcomes over a period of time may be arranged. Alternatively a single assessment, involving two surfaces and two types of stains, may be arranged. All safety procedures and procedures involving the use of equipment and the use and disposal of chemicals must be strictly observed. Evidence of competency may be obtained from observation of the following: • Methodology used to determine the type of stain and surface • Selection of equipment and chemicals to treat the stain • Use of outside sources of assistance and advice to confirm the procedure selected • Quality outcomes achieved in relation to the job specification



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

73

Additional evidence may be obtained through oral questioning to determine the candidate’s understanding of the • Implications of using the wrong product on a stained soft floor surface • Advice given to a client in relation to a/the stain in question • Steps and processes to be followed when unusual or non-documented stains are found An alternative option for assessment may be the satisfactory completion of a structured work related project involving two or more stains or two or more types of surfaces, supplemented by a written or oral report. Sufficient time should be allowed for self-assessment and practice, before assessments are planned and conducted.

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue • Manufacturer/enterprise product specifications • Job specifications and reporting forms • A range of equipment, including personal protective equipment and relevant cleaning or spot removing

chemicals • Material safety data sheets and equipment operating manuals, if relevant • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

75


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer.

This unit should be applied in association with Unit PRMCL05A: Remove stains and spillages from soft floors.


1 Set up site 1 Site, availability and time are confirmed

with client in advance

2 Items to be removed and/or relocated are identified to ensure clear access to soft floor is obtained


4 Site is pre-vacuumed where specified by client or company policy


2 Set up dry foam machinery and equipment 1 Occupational health and safety guidelines for machinery, equipment and chemical use are followed accurately

2 All required machinery and equipment to complete the job is assembled so that it is readily available during the dry foam process

3 Cleaning chemicals required for the job are obtained and/or diluted in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

4 All machinery and equipment is checked prior to use for safe operation

5 Filtration systems are tested and checked for clear operation

3 Pre-spot soft floor to remove stains 1 The type of mark or spot is identified accurately

2 The most effective chemical agent for the type of spot is selected and applied in a safe manner to manufacturers’ instructions and company requirements

3 Gloves and/or breathing masks are used in accordance with relevant health and safety requirements

PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

76

4 Apply dry foam to soft floor 1 Manufacturers’ instructions for dry foam machine usage are followed accurately

2 Foam is applied evenly in a methodical manner and a consistent moisture level maintained

3 Walk over of damp areas is kept to a minimum

4 Foam is applied without discolouration or shrinkage of soft floor

5 Waste chemical is disposed of safely in accordance with applicable environmental regulations and company policy

5 Vacuum dry foam from soft floor 1 Vacuum is applied to remove all dry foam in accordance with manufacturers specifications

2 Where necessary, pile is lifted to improve appearance of soft floor

6 Clean and pack machinery and equipment 1 Machinery and equipment is cleaned in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions immediately work is completed

2 All items are packed and stored to enable easy access for the next job

3 Any solid wastes, filters or other residues are disposed of in accordance with relevant environmental regulation and company policy

7 Return site to condition required by client 1 Liaise with client to ensure all areas have been completed and furniture returned as required

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Dry foam shampooing may be applied to domestic or commercial soft floors Work is usually conducted individually Relevant occupational health and safety guidelines includes state and federal legislation; industry codes of practice and company policy and manufacturers specifications Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance material referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ specifications and safety data are pre-printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; laminated safety cards on site or wall posters

PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

77

Equipment may include dry foam machine; vacuum machine; spotting agent dispenser; buckets; carpet brushes; cleaning cloths etc. Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Methods of applying dry foam Pre-spotting and stain removal procedures Product knowledge Enterprise safety procedures Client and job specifications Manufacturers’ specifications, including physical hazards associated with certain products

Analysis of floor type suitability Product selection and application techniques Communication and problem solving Work planning and site preparation Equipment operation and cleaning Reporting and recording of job outcomes Finding and using information

Assessment may be undertaken in conjunction with Unit PRM CL05: Remove stains and spillages from soft floors. Competency is to be demonstrated on the job, over the full range of performance criteria in this unit. Multiple assessments (no more than two, involving two different surfaces and two different types of dry foam) to determine consistency of outcomes over a period of time may be arranged. Alternatively a single assessment, involving two surfaces and two types of product, may be arranged. All safety procedures and procedures involving the use of equipment and the use and disposal of chemicals must be strictly observed. Evidence of competency may be obtained from observation of the following: • Methodology used to determine the type or range of products to be used • Selection of equipment and dry foam materials • Use of outside sources of assistance and advice to confirm the procedure selected • Quality outcomes achieved in relation to the job specification Additional evidence may be obtained through oral questioning to determine the candidate’s understanding of the • Implications of using one product in preference to another • Advice given to a client in relation to surface finish required • Steps and processes to be followed when unusual or non-documented stains are found An alternative option for assessment may be the satisfactory completion of a structured work related project involving two or more types of surfaces, supplemented by a written or oral report. Sufficient time should be allowed for self-assessment and practice, before assessments are planned and conducted.

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue • Manufacturer/enterprise product specifications • Job specifications and reporting forms • A range of equipment, including personal protective equipment and relevant cleaning or spot removing

chemicals • Material safety data sheets and equipment operating manuals, if relevant • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL07A Remove dirt and soil from soft floors or fabric upholstery using a water extraction method.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

79


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL07A Remove dirt and soil from soft floors or fabric upholstery using a water extraction method.




2 Items to be removed and/or relocated are identified to ensure clear access is obtained


4 Surface to be cleaned is pre-vacuumed where specified by client or company policy


2 Set up extraction machinery and equipment 1 Relevant health and safety and manufacturers’ requirements are followed

2 All required machinery and equipment to complete the job is assembled so that it is readily available during the extraction process

3 Cleaning chemicals that will assist loosen soil and leave a fresh fragrance are obtained and/or mixed in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications


5 Wand appropriate to surface type and degree of soiling is selected

3 Pre-spray surface 1 Surface is assessed to establish areas of heavy and light soiling and the need for spot cleaning

2 Chemical application is tested for discolouration in a discrete location

3 Pre-spray is applied to soiled areas in quantities sufficient to loosen soil without wastage

4 Chemicals are used strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant health and safety requirements

5 Overspray of cleaning chemicals on



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

80

furniture and fittings is avoided to reduce possible damage

4 Apply extraction wand to surface 1 Manufacturers’ instructions for wand and extraction machine usage are followed

2 Spots are removed where required prior to wand application

3 Wand is applied to each area methodically

4 Water pressure and supply is checked regularly and adjusted to ensure correct working levels

5 Correct wand application posture is maintained

6 Waste water is disposed of safely in accordance with applicable environmental regulations and company policy

7 Wand is applied without damage to client furniture or fittings

5 Clean and pack machinery and equipment 1 Machinery and equipment is cleaned in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions when work is completed


3 Any solid wastes, filters or other residues are disposed of in accordance relevant environmental regulation and company policy


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Water extraction may be known by the trade name of 'carpet shampooing' when applied to soft floors Water extraction may also be known as 'steam cleaning' in some parts of the industry Water extraction may be applied to domestic or commercial soft floors, or suitable heavy duty fabric upholstery Work may be conducted in teams or individually Application may vary according to the type, age and extent of soil in the surface



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

81

Machine types and manufacturers vary but all apply hot water under pressure using a wand to the surface. Wand types may vary and can determine the type of application on the job Wand types can include: drag wand; scrub wand; rotary head wand; power head wand; upholstery wand; fabric wand Relevant occupational health and safety guidelines includes state and federal legislation; industry codes of practice and company policy and manufacturers’ specifications Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance material referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ specifications and safety data are pre-printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; laminated safety cards on site or wall posters Equipment may include buckets; carpet brushes; cleaning cloths etc. Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Liquid extraction methods Pre-spotting and stain removal procedures Product knowledge Enterprise safety procedures and practices Client and job specifications Manufacturers’ specifications, including physical hazards associated with certain products

Analysis of surface suitability for water extraction Product selection and application techniques Problem solving Work planning and site preparation Equipment operation and cleaning Reporting and recording of job outcomes Manual handling, noise control and waste disposal techniques Finding and using information Customer service and communication skills

This unit may be assessed in combination with Unit PRM CL05: Remove stains and spillages from soft floor surfaces. Assessment of competency should establish the individual’s ability to perform the job to the standard required in the workplace. Assessment should be undertaken through a single practical demonstration, involving two different soft surface types with varying surface areas and wear patterns. Evidence of competency may be derived from observation of the following: • Selection of equipment and materials • Preparation of the worksite • The application of safe work practices in the performance of the job • Liquid application, extraction and disposal techniques • The quality of the surface finish on completion of the job Evidence of underpinning knowledge may be obtained from oral questions about safe work practices and reasons why certain liquid extraction techniques and products were used in preference to others for avoiding soaking over-wetting surfaces for extra extraction and drying techniques to be applied Other forms of evidence may include supervisor reports and client survey responses.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

82

Resources Required for Assessment • Selection of relevant cleaning equipment, including extractor wands • A range of cleaning products • A suitable venue for assessment, including two or more different types of floor/upholstery surfaces • Relevant assessment instruments, personal planner and record book • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Manufacturer and product supplier manuals and instruction sheets • Job specifications

PRMCL08A - Cleaning


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

83

STREAM AM Asset Maintenance

FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL08A Bonnet buff soft floor to achieve a clean surface appearance.




2 Items to be removed and/or relocated are identified to ensure clear access to soft floor is obtained

3 Furniture and fittings are removed and/or relocated in a safe manner without damage

4 Site is pre-vacuumed where specified by client or company policy


2 Set up bonnet equipment 1 Relevant occupational health and safety and manufacturers’ guidelines are followed

2 All required machinery and equipment to complete the job is assembled so that it is readily available during the buffing process

3 Bonnet cleaning solution is obtained and/or mixed in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications


5 Bonnet is pre-rinsed to ensure clean application

3 Pre-spray soft floor 1 Soft floor is assessed to establish areas of heavy and light soiling and the need for spot cleaning

2 Chemical application is tested for discolouration in a discrete location

3 Pre-spray is applied to soiled areas in quantities sufficient to loosen soil without wastage

4 Chemicals are used strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant health and safety requirements

5 Overspray of cleaning chemicals on furniture and fittings is avoided to reduce possible damage



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

84

4 Apply bonnet to floor using rotary machine 1 Manufacturers’ instructions for buffing machine usage are followed accurately

2 Bonnet is applied in a methodical manner to ensure full floor coverage

3 Bonnet is kept damp with cleaning solution during application

4 Ventilation is provided during buffing to shorten the drying time

5 Walk over of buffed areas is avoided where possible

5 Apply drying bonnet to soft floor 1 Drying bonnet is applied promptly to ensure no areas remain damp

6 Clean and pack equipment 1 Machinery and equipment is cleaned in accordance with manufacturers’ instruction immediately work is completed


3 Any solid wastes, filters or other residues are disposed of in accordance with relevant environmental regulation and company policy

4 All bonnets are thoroughly washed in cleaning solution, rinsed and dried


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Work may be conducted in teams or individually Application may vary according to the type; age and extent of soil in the soft floor Relevant occupational health and safety guidelines includes state and federal legislation; industry codes of practice and company policy and manufacturers’ specifications Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance material referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ specifications and safety data are pre printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; laminated safety cards on site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

PRMCL08A - Cleaning


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

85

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Various surface requirements Bonnet buffing techniques Equipment use, cleaning and storage requirements Waste disposal techniques Enterprise and job specifications

Manual handling Bonnet buffing Cleaning and extraction techniques Waste minimisation Team work Work planning and organisation

Competence is to be demonstrated to the standard required over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. All safety equipment and procedures must be strictly observed. Evidence of competency may be derived from observation of the following: • Selection of equipment and materials suited to the floor surface and wear patterns • Coordination of work and safety practices, either individually or in teams • Removal and disposal of wastes from the work site • Cleaning and storage of equipment and materials after use • Surface finish achieved in relation to job specification and customer expectations Oral questioning may be used to determine understanding of • Enterprise and client requirements • The need for safe work practices • Public safety issues associated with bonnet buffing

Resources Required for Assessment • Selection of relevant cleaning equipment • A range of cleaning products • A suitable venue for assessment, including two or more different types of floor surfaces • Relevant assessment instruments, personal planner and record book • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Manufacturer and product supplier manuals and instruction sheets • Job specifications

PRMCL09A Wash and squeegee glass surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

87


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL09A Wash and squeegee glass surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime.

This unit applies to all glass surfaces, including windows, both internal and external.

When applied to external windows, the unit may be applied with Unit PRMCL36: Carry out high level cleaning

When applied to glass on a frequent basis, Unit PRMCL15: Maintain furniture and fittings and dress and area or room, is relevant to irregular spot cleaning of readily accessible glass surfaces


1 Set up site for glass cleaning 1 Client is notified of intention to clean

glass and accessibility is confirmed

2 All obstructions to safe access are removed prior to commencing work

3 Glass access equipment is set up in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and tested for safe operation prior to use

4 Window coverings are moved to ensure free access to the glass area to be cleaned


2 Select and prepare glass cleaning equipment 1 Lint free absorbent cloth is selected that will not leave textile residue on wiped surfaces

2 Cleaning detergent suitable for loosening soil is selected and mixed to dilution according to manufacturers’ specifications

3 Squeegee rubbers are checked to be smooth, sharp and clean

4 Largest squeegee suitable for glass area is selected to maximise area of coverage

3 Prepare glass surface 1 Glass type is determined to ensure method of cleaning will not damage surface

2 Adhered soil is scraped from glass surface to ensure squeegee operation will not streak

3 Glass is checked for defects to avoid injury or damage



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

88

4 Spot cleaning methods are applied where glass has soft surface coating

5 Any damage or defects are reported to the site supervisor as appropriate

4 Apply washing and squeegee equipment to glass surface

1 Glass is washed with cleaning solution using an applicator to loosen surface soil

2 Squeegee is applied whilst glass is wet to remove cleaning solution without streaking

3 Window edges and sills are wiped with damp cloth to remove all traces of cleaning solution and soil

4 Cleaned glass is observed from alternative angles to be free from soil, marks or smearing

5 Clean up and restore site to original condition

1 All protective coverings are removed and any spillages cleaned up and dried

2 All moved items are returned to original position

3 Window coverings are returned to original position




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Chemicals used in glass cleaning are usually water softening detergents. In some instances higher concentrations of cleaning solution may be required Equipment can include: lint free cleaning cloths; squeegees (various sizes); extension poles; hoses; brushes; applicators (usually lambswool) Access equipment can include: telescopic extension pole; ladder; gantry; scaffold; scissor lift; and approved absailing Special licences and/or permits may be required for the use of some access equipment: eg gantry unit; absailing; some scissor cranes



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

89

Coated glass is not usually squeegeed Glass defects may include thinning with age; cracks or scratches Adhered soil can include: gum; adhesive; paint; dried encrustations; office chemicals (whiteout etc.); pen marks; paint; concrete; exhaust pollution; smog; hospital residue Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information may be pre-printed on chemical containers; on material safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or on wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Product knowledge Glass types, including defects Enterprise and client job specifications, Access requirements Enterprise and client safety regulations and Safe work practices Glass cleaning techniques Equipment and materials storage procedures

Planning and organising work Manual handling Waste minimisation Customer service Finding and using information

Competency in this unit might be assessed in conjunction with a number of other units, including units PRM CL11, PRM CL12, PRM CL15, PRM CL17 and PRM CL36 Competence is to be demonstrated to the standard required in the workplace. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time may be achieved by staggering the assessment process to accommodate time lapses or by arranging access to two venues with different glass cleaning requirements. The safe use of equipment and materials within agreed procedures should be strictly observed, particularly in relation to work at heights. Evidence of underpinning knowledge may be obtained through observation involving • Planning and obtaining access to the work site • Clarifying the nature of the cleaning problem • Determining the application of cleaning agents • Restoring the work site • Cleaning up the work site and completing necessary job records • The finished surface in relation to the job specification. Evidence may also be obtained through oral questioning to determine • Reasons for selecting certain products or procedures in preference to others • Tips for minimising waste of resources and maximising the cleaning effect • Understanding of possible differences between the (employer) enterprise and client’s customer service

expectations • The relationship between work practices and injury and damage prevention



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

90

RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Access to a suitable venue and variable glass cleaning requirements • Job specifications • Relevant equipment and materials • Product specifications, including safety data sheets • Job reporting forms • Assessment instruments, including personal planner, training and assessment record book • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

91


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings.


1 Prepare work site 1 Client is notified of work prior to

commencement and accessibility confirmed

2 Drop sheets are placed on floor, equipment and furniture to collect any falling dust, grime or cleaning solution where required

3 Work area is signed and barricaded to guard against accidental injury in accordance with relevant health and safety and company requirements


2 Select and prepare equipment 1 Ceiling area to be detailed is confirmed through reference to client specifications and/or instructions

2 Equipment selected is appropriate for area characteristics and soil type

3 Chemical agent suitable for soil type is decanted and diluted in accordance with manufacturers specifications and relevant safety requirements

4 Height access and other safety equipment is selected and checked to be in good working condition

5 Cobwebber and extension is prepared using suitable antistatic cloth to trap web and dust

3 Detail ceiling surfaces and fittings 1 Dry dust and cobwebs are removed without spreading dust into room or marking surfaces

2 Inaccessible or hidden areas are vacuumed to remove loose dust using a non-abrasive brush head

3 Work requiring the use of ladders is conducted in pairs to ensure safe operation

4 Prepared chemicals are applied to clean damp cloth and wiped over surface of fittings to remove adhered soil whilst avoiding contact with electrical fittings



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

92

5 All cleaning solution is rinsed from the

surface before it dries to prevent marking

6 Protective clothing is worn when cleaning agents are applied or being cleaned up




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Ceilings are defined as any wall or ceiling over 2 metres The work activity covered by this unit can also be known as 'high dusting - cobwebbing' or 'detailing' Work is usually done in pairs where the use of ladders is required Work is usually performed monthly or as required by client specification Work is usually done out of normal work hours and tenant is absent Ceiling fittings may include: recessed lights; ornamental hanging lights; projected lights; ceiling fans; televisions; speakers; smoke detectors; sprinkler systems; vents and grilles; skylights; cameras etc. Ceiling can be flat or suspended and made of hard or absorbent material Chemicals used include: solvent; neutral PH detergent; degreasers; disinfectants; abrasives Equipment may include: antistatic duster / cleaning cloth; vacuum cleaner with circular brushes; sponges; buckets; scourer; glass cleaning equipment; drop sheets; 'A' frame ladders; cobwebber Manufacturers’ specifications and safety data are pre-printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated cards at the work site or wall poster Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

93

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Product knowledge Enterprise and client job specifications Access requirements Enterprise and client safety regulations and safe work practices Cleaning techniques Equipment and materials storage procedures

Planning and organising work Manual handling Waste minimisation Customer service Finding and using information Team work Decanting chemicals

This unit may be assessed in combination with Unit PRM CL36: Carry out high level cleaning. Competency is to be demonstrated through a single, practical, demonstration over the full range of performance criteria to the standard required in the workplace. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time may be achieved by observation in conjunction with supplementary evidence provided by supervisor reports and client satisfaction survey reports. Note: Due to safety considerations involved in working at height in some buildings, assessment in this unit is confined to ceiling heights within the 2-4 metre range. Where ladders are required, a team approach to assessment may be used. Assessments involving heights greater than 4 metres should be undertaken in combination with the appropriate unit: Carry out high level cleaning . It is recommended that candidates have the opportunity to undertake self-assessment before being formally assessed. Underpinning knowledge may be determined from observation of: • The selection and use of protective clothing, equipment and techniques appropriate for ceiling cleaning • Compliance with Australian Bureau of Standards and WORKSAFE Australia Codes of Practice for the safe

use of ladders • The application and use of cleaning solutions and vacuum cleaners in areas which are difficult to access • The cleaning and safe disposal/storage of equipment and materials used in the process • The application and removal of rinsing solutions from ceiling surfaces • The finish achieved in relation to the job specification • Safety checks carried out on equipment before, during and after the job is completed Additional evidence may be obtained from oral questioning of: • Reasons why certain techniques were used in preference to others • Reasons for the disposal of some materials and equipment and cleaning and storage of others • Reasons for erecting signs and barricades and working in teams in certain work areas • Procedures required for reporting accidents and near-misses • Sources of information on first aid Resources Required for Assessment • Chemical colour charts • Material safety data sheets • Accident report forms • Area for demonstration • Safety equipment, such as signs and barricades • Drop cloths, protective clothing and equipment • Ladders, cobwebbers, vacuum cleaners and non-abrasive dust heads • Equipment cleaning implements • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL011A – Spot Clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

95


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL11A Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks.

This unit covers the cleaning of external surfaces, including the removal of graffiti.

Unit PRM CL36: Carry out high level cleaning, may need to be associated where cleaning is carried out above ground level.


1 Select and set up equipment 1 Client is notified of work prior to

commencement and accessibility confirmed

2 Type of wall surface and nature of soiling is identified to determine the kind of removal method and equipment required

3 All equipment is checked to be clean and in good working order

4 Chemical agents suitable to soil type that will not damage wall surface are decanted and diluted safely in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

5 Work area is signed and barricaded to reduce risk of accident in accordance with relevant safety requirements

6 Protective clothing is selected and worn in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant safety requirements

7 Where the use of ladders is required work is organised in teams of two


2 Identify need for spot cleaning 1 Inspections of external walls are carried out to identify areas requiring spot cleaning

2 Reports of graffiti are reviewed to identify if work required can be attended to within relevant specification

3 Apply cleaning agent 1 Selected cleaning agent is applied direct to spot without overspray and allowed sufficient time to act

2 Area is rinsed with neutral detergent solution before cleaning agent is dry to remove all traces of soil, markings and cleaning solution



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

96

3 Spots or markings that cannot be removed completely are reported as appropriate for further attention




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Work can be performed as part of routine cleaning activity or as a separate operation External wall cleaning under contract is usually only performed up to a height of two (2) metres. Over this height the work is usually performed by specialist operators External walls can be: terrazzo; ceramic; brick; concrete; steel; wood; metal etc. Some wall surfaces are only cleaned by specialists eg. sandstone in Heritage locations Types of spot soiling include: graffiti (texta; paint; ink); encrusted human waste; scuff marks etc. Chemicals used include common neutral detergent and specialised graffiti removal agent which is environmentally sensitive and safe for normal operator use. Can be used at three levels of dilution depending on type of soil/mark Equipment includes: scourer pad; scrubbing brush; cleaning cloth; 'A' frame ladder; spray bottle Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information may be pre-printed on chemical containers; on company material safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Safe work practices External wall cleaning methods Product knowledge Enterprise and client job specifications Cleaning and storage procedures Environmental and work safety requirements

Application of cleaning agents Reporting procedures Cleaning and storing of equipment and materials Safe placement of barricades and signs Waste management and disposal Site inspection reports Problem solving and communication Basic numeracy and literacy Dexterity in operating equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

97

This unit may be assessed in combination with Unit PRM CL12: Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dust and grime and Unit PRM CL36: Carry out high level cleaning. Competence is to be demonstrated through practical demonstrations over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing practical job requirements. All safety requirements must be strictly observed. Underpinning knowledge should be assessed through observation of work undertaken on external surfaces involving: • The identification of relevant cleaning requirements • Planning and organising work, including the procurement of equipment and materials that match job

requirements • The application of cleaning agents to remove spots on external surfaces • The use of chemicals to remove stubborn stains • The disposal of wastes and the cleaning and storage of materials and equipment • The finish achieved in relation to the job specification Appreciation of the candidate’s understanding of job requirements may be obtained through oral questioning about mixing and disposing of chemicals used on external walls. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to read and comprehend the requirements of relevant enterprise procedures (where written), workshop manuals/bulletins and manufacturers’ specifications. Basic numeracy requirements include the ability to understand units of volume associated with breaking down large quantities of chemicals, or combining chemicals to form compounds suitable for use in cleaning external surfaces. Other forms of evidence may include supervisor reports and customer satisfaction surveys. RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Relevant equipment and materials, including cleaning agents, protective clothing and equipment, barricades

and safety signs, equipment cleaning apparatus. • Job specifications • Site safety requirements, chemical colour code charts • Equipment operating specifications • Enterprise and manufacturer procedure manuals, where relevant • Suitable venue with stained surface for cleaning • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

99


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime.


1 Identify and confirm need to wash external

walls 1 Walls to be washed are identified from

client specifications or job instructions

2 A knowledge of soil types, surfaces and cleaning agents is used to determine if washing will be effective in cleaning the surface

3 Access to the area is confirmed

4 Areas adjacent to wall are checked to determine if there is the possibility of damage occuring and preventative action planned


2 Obtain and set up washing equipment 1 A suitable cleaning agent is selected based on an assessment of the type of surfaces and type of grime to be washed

2 Cleaning agent is pre-mixed where necessary at correct dilution and temperature as required by manufacturers’ specifications in accordance with safety requirements

3 All equipment is checked to be in good working order to manufacturers’ specifications

4 Where required, suitable wet area safety connections are used for all electrical fittings

5 Suitable nozzle and extension equipment is fitted to pressure systems to suit operative size and strength

6 Protective clothing is obtained and checked to be in good working condition

3 Apply washing equipment to external wall 1 Small and hidden areas are washed by hand and rinsed prior to commencing machine based wash

2 Area is signed and barricaded to avoid accidents in terms of safety and company requirements



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

100

3 All cleaning agent is rinsed from wall before dry to avoid discolouration

4 Pressure jets are applied from ground level using a sturdy two handed grip on pressure nozzle

5 Excess water is removed from wall or surrounding area before returning the area to general usage

4 Clean and store washing implements 1 Washing implements and cleaning cloths are washed in a suitable cleaning agent to remove all dirt and grime

2 All electrical cords are rewound without kinks or tangles

3 All equipment is wiped down before storage and checked to be in good working condition

4 Equipment faults or malfunctions are reported to site supervisor without delay

5 Washed equipment is stored in an accessible location ready for reuse

RANGE OF VARIABLES

External walls are washed to a height of two (2) metres Over this height the work is usually performed by specialist operators Most external walls are cleaned with a high pressure water jet Manual work is confined to restricted locations Equipment may include: high pressure water jet machine Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information may be pre printed on chemical containers; on material safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

101

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Safe work practices External wall cleaning methods Product knowledge Enterprise and client job specifications Cleaning and storage procedures Environmental and work safety requirements

Application of cleaning agents Use of pressure jets on solid surfaces Reporting procedures Cleaning and storing of equipment and materials Safe placement of barricades and signs Waste management and disposal Site inspection reports Problem solving and communication Basic numeracy and literacy Dexterity in operating pressure jet equipment

This unit may be assessed in combination with Unit PRM CL11: Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks and Unit PRM CL37: Carry out high level cleaning. Competence is to be demonstrated through practical demonstrations over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing practical job requirements. All safety requirements must be strictly observed. Underpinning knowledge should be assessed through observation of work undertaken on external surfaces involving: • The identification of relevant cleaning requirements • Planning and organising work, including the procurement of equipment and materials that match job

requirements • The application of cleaning agents to remove spots on external surfaces • The use of pressure jets to remove stubborn stains • The disposal of wastes and the cleaning and storage of materials and equipment • The finish achieved in relation to the job specification Appreciation of the candidate’s understanding of job requirements may be obtained through oral questioning about environmental and safety regulations associated with the use of pressure jets on rigid surfaces, chemicals ph scales and the preparation and disposal of cleaning agents on and off-site. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to read and comprehend the requirements of enterprise procedures (where written) workshop manuals/bulletins and manufacturers’ specifications. Basic numeracy requirements include the ability to understand units of pressure associated with pressure jets. Particular consideration should be given to assessing the candidate’s understanding of hydrostatic (pressure) testing and the identification and use of specialised pressure jet equipment. Other forms of evidence may include supervisor reports and customer satisfaction surveys. RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Relevant equipment and materials, including cleaning agents, protective clothing and equipment, barricades

and safety signs, equipment cleaning apparatus. • Job specifications • Site safety requirements, chemical colour code charts • Equipment operating specifications • Enterprise and manufacturer procedure manuals, where relevant • Suitable venue with stained surface for cleaning • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL13A Undertake detail cleaning of window coverings to remove all dirt and grime.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

103


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL13A Undertake detail cleaning of window coverings to remove all dirt and grime.


1 Review the need for cleaning window

coverings 1 The client requirements for window

cover cleaning and accessibility are confirmed

2 The type of window covering and fixture method is identified

3 The most effective method for removal, cleaning and replacement is determined after consideration of location, fixture and cleaning facilities available


2 Plan the job groups for window covering cleaning

1 Job lots are calculated to ensure the coverings removed and cleaned at any one time do not exceed capacity of cleaning facility

2 Covering removal is planned to work in an orderly fashion one area at a time

3 Prepare the washing site 1 Washing site is signed and barricaded in terms of safety regulations and company policy

2 Drying area is separated from the washing area to maximise drying effort and reduce incidence of overspray

3 All electrical connections are made with safety connectors suitable for safe wet area operation

4 All equipment is checked to be in good working order in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

5 Wash area has suitable drainage facilities in accordance with relevant environmental and local government requirements

4 Remove window coverings 1 Window coverings are checked for correct operation and pre-existing damage prior to removal

2 Written report is prepared on pre-existing damage or operational faults



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

104

3 All ladders are used in teams of two and overhead removal is carried out in accordance with relevant safety and company requirements

4 No damage is caused to window coverings, fittings or surrounding area during removal

5 Coverings are marked or tagged to clearly indicate site of removal to ensure correct replacement after detailing

6 Loose fittings are marked and stored securely at removal site ready for replacement

5 Wash and dry coverings 1 Coverings are sorted between those requiring full immersion wash and wash down methods

2 Textile based coverings are dry cleaned or machine laundered in accordance with material manufacturers’ instructions and/or client specifications

3 All chemical solutions are prepared and used in a safe manner in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

4 Chemical solution is selected to suit material type ensuring the concentration will not damage covering when applied

5 All chemical solution is rinsed with clean water before the solution dry to avoid smears and marks developing

6 Excess water is shaken or otherwise removed from the coverings prior to drying

7 Covering is dried evenly using open air or hot air blowers

8 Covering is checked and spot cleaned where necessary to complete the detail clean

6 Refit window coverings 1 Coverings are refitted in team pairs to ensure coverings can be moved without damage

2 Coverings are refitted rolled up where possible to improve maneuverability

3 Covering is checked to be in good working order after refitting



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

105

7 Clean and restore wash area 1 Wash area is mopped and squeegeed dry where appropriate to remove all excess moisture

2 All traces of cleaning solution are removed and area is left in a neutral PH condition

3 Excess cleaning solution is disposed of in accordance with relevant environmental and local government regulations




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Window coverings include: fixed pelmet system; venetian blinds; vertical blinds; lined curtains; unlined curtains; holland blinds; shutter systems; awnings; flywire and security screens Window covering can be made from: cloth; vinyl; metal; plastic; wood or textile Equipment includes: screwdrivers; ladders; hoses; pressure washing equipment; hot air dryers; soft broom; cleaning cloths Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Client requirements and job specifications Fitting and removal procedures for window awnings, blinds and coverings On-site safe work practices and procedures Spot identification and removal Chemical scales Chemical handling and disposal techniques Safety and environmental protection regulations applying to the job

Site inspection report preparation Dexterity to fit safety connectors to electrical equipment Manual handling Basic literacy and numeracy Basic wash-down and full immersion wash techniques Chemical lot break down



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

106

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consideration should be given to assessing consistency of outcome over a period of time. Candidates should therefore be given the opportunity to practise and undertake self-assessment of performance before formal assessments are undertaken. Underpinning knowledge may be inferred from observations of: • Selection and use of equipment, including hand and power tools to dismantle, clean and reassemble window

treatments. • Selection, use, cleaning and storage of equipment and materials used during cleaning operations • Finish obtained in relation to the job specification and client expectations • Cooperation and team work employed before, during and after the job. Additional information may be obtained from oral questioning, supervisors’ reports and customer satisfaction surveys, if necessary. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to prepare and explain site reports; follow simple, written instructions − particularly in relation to the use of electrical equipment in wet areas. Basic numeracy requirements include the ability to apply units of volume in breaking down bulk chemicals for use on site. Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant site(s), equipment and materials • Job specifications • Manufacturers’ equipment operating specifications • Material safety data sheets • WORKSAFE Codes of Practice for window and window covering treatment/cleaning involving the use of

ladders • Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) guidelines on the management and disposal of waste water to

public drains • Relevant equipment and materials, including safety equipment and signs

PRMCL14A Maintain a clean room environment with no traces of visible dust.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

107


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL14A Maintain a clean room environment with no traces of visible dust.


1 Select and set up equipment 1 All equipment is checked to ensure it is

in good working condition to manufacturers’ specifications and relevant safety regulations

2 Lint free cleaning cloths are selected to ensure no textile residue is left on cleaned surfaces

3 Vacuum cleaners are fitted with clean micron filters and bags, tubing and tools are free of all visible dust

4 Cleaning solutions are prepared to manufacturers’ recommended dilution in accordance with relevant safety regulations

5 Buffing brushes/pads appropriate to floor type are selected and checked to be free of all dust and soil

6 Cleaning cloths are impregnated with appropriate anti-static solution to ensure wiped surfaces are discharged on application


2 Prepare room for cleaning 1 All foreign articles are removed from the room prior to cleaning to provide clear access

2 All waste is removed and disposed of in accordance with client requirements

3 All movable furniture and fittings are shifted to allow access to hidden dust areas

4 The position of loose and temporary wiring is noted to ensure the integrity of connections is maintained

5 The availability of power outlets suitable for cleaning equipment is established through liaison with client

6 Room cleaning procedures are planned to move from the highest to the lowest point within the room



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

108

3 Wipe all accessible surfaces 1 All visible surfaces are wiped with anti-static impregnated cloth whether dust is visible or not

2 Marks are removed using minimal volume of appropriate spray solvent on selected cleaning cloth

3 Excess moisture or cleaning solution is wiped up immediately to ensure no leakage to equipment occurs

4 Apply vacuum extraction to inaccessible surfaces

1 Vacuum crevice tool is applied to all surfaces inaccessible to manual wiping and/or sight

2 Vacuum is plugged into allocated electrical outlets to avoid interference with any electronic systems

3 Crevice tool is applied without damage to equipment, furniture or fittings

5 Apply dust control mop 1 Dust mop is applied to all floor areas to ensure full coverage of area

2 Dust mop maintains floor contact at all times to ensure no dust becomes airborne

6 Damp mop floors if required by client 1 Damp mop, sufficiently moistened to remove dirt and dust, is applied with minimal moisture being allowed to settle on surfaces

2 Moisture is kept away from all floor channels to ensure no contamination of any system wiring laid under raised floor

7 Buff floors if required by client 1 Buffing machine is connected to client approved outlet to avoid disruption to system power supply

2 Buffing brushes/pads are fitted to ensure no textile residues are dispersed during application

3 Buffing machine is controlled to ensure no interference or damage to room systems occurs





Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

109


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Clean rooms are rooms where the presence of visible dust presents a hazard to the safe operation of electronic equipment. It is not to be confused with a controlled particle level environment Examples of clean rooms are: specialised computer installation; PABX room; electronic manufacturing environments Clean room cleaning incorporates a number of cleaning competencies to achieve the required outcomes and effective performance is based on their correct application as defined elsewhere Equipment may include: ladders; vacuum unit; dust mop; lint free cleaning cloths; mop head and bucket; dust pan and broom Chemicals include: solvent spray; anti static solution; anti static sprays Surfaces cleaned in a clean room environment include: furniture; fittings; equipment casing; cabling; vents and grilles Manufacturers’ specifications and safety data are pre-printed on chemical containers; on material safety data sheets; on laminated cards at the work site or wall posters Protective clothing may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Client requirements and job specifications Room cleaning procedures Health and safety procedures

Manual handling Work planning and organisation

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consideration should be given to assessing consistency of outcome over a period of time. Candidates should therefore be given the opportunity to practise and undertake self-assessment of performance before formal assessments are undertaken. Underpinning knowledge may be inferred from observations of: • Selection and use of equipment, including electrical and hand tools used to extract and contain dust • Selection, use, cleaning and storage of equipment and materials used • Finish obtained in relation to the job specification and client expectations • Cooperation and team work employed before, during and after the job. Additional information may be obtained from oral questioning, supervisors’ reports and customer satisfaction surveys, if necessary. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to follow simple, written instructions relating to cleaning ‘clean’ rooms and complete simple job reporting tasks.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

110

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant site(s), equipment and materials • Job specifications • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books • Job reporting forms • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

111


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room.

This unit covers all furniture and fittings including office equipment.


1 Assess area to be cleaned and dressed 1 Client requirements for presentation

and layout of room are identified and followed accurately, including restocking of consumable items

2 Accessibility of area for cleaning is confirmed

3 Type of furniture, fittings and loose items are identified

4 Degree and type of soiling is assessed so that suitable cleaning methods can be adopted

5 Power supplies to electrical equipment are noted to ensure they are not interrupted during wiping operations


2 Select and set up equipment 1 Cleaning agents and equipment are selected to suit the type of surfaces and soil

3 Dust surfaces to remove waste where required

1 All waste is removed from surface using damp or dry dusting as appropriate

2 Duster is moved around client merchandise or materials without change in location of items as specified by client or company policy

4 Damp wipe furniture and fittings to remove adhered soil where required

1 Damp wiped surfaces are smear free without excess moisture or cleaning agent residue on the surface

2 Cleaning agents are used in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and relevant health and safety regulations

3 Wiped surfaces are free from soil and dried rapidly to avoid build up of further soil deposits on damp surface

5 Spot clean surfaces where required 1 Spots are removed through application of cleaning agent as required by soil and surface type



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

112

2 Difficult spots are removed in a safe manner with a sharp blade where suitable for surface type

3 Non-removable marks and spots are reported

6 Apply polish to restore applicable surfaces where required

1 All marks, spots and stains are removed and surface is clean and dry prior to polishing

2 Surface is cleared of all removable items within client instructions

3 Polish is applied evenly and without excess following the grain where relevant to avoid scratching

4 Surface is polished to required lustre




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Furniture and fittings can include: desks; tables; chairs; computers; filing cabinets; clocks; stoves; lamps; railing; window sills; skirting; doors; door handles; light switches; telephone hand sets; air conditioning vents; lights; ceiling fans; blinds; curtains; grilles; refrigerators; picture frames; shelves; compactus; work stations; showcases; bars; beds; bedside cupboards etc. Loose items may include cups and saucers; kitchen implements; signs; mats; bins; ash trays; electrical leads; wall charts; books; consumables such as soaps, food and drink etc. Cleaning agents may include: hot water; detergent and a cleaning chemical; polishes DUSTING Dusters/mini mops are made of natural fibre lambswool or feathers and are lint free The cleaning surface is attached to a stick at one end Dusters are soft and will not damage surfaces Dusters can be dry or impregnated with a cleaning oil; and also may be anti-static DAMP WIPING All electrical equipment is wiped and not sprayed in order to avoid possibility of electrical shock and/or equipment damage



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

113

A typical wiping kit includes: lint free cleaning cloths; bucket; cleaning agent; oil impregnated cloth; solution for wiping indoor plant leaves POLISHING Surfaces that may be polished include: timber; brass; silver; stainless steel; glass A polishing kit may include: polishing cloths; polishing chemicals (agents); scourers; buckets Polishing cloths are usually 100% cotton; lint free; colour fast; absorbent Polishing agents include: neutral detergents; alkaline based compounds; silicon based; methylated spirits; ammonia based compounds; stainless steel oil; wood polish and waxes etc. Damage caused by polishing can include: stains left on surface; streaking; scratching; chemical bonding with surface Oils/wax are usually used on absorbent surfaces where the application protects the surface in addition to providing a lustre DRESSING Room dressing is the placement and location of furniture; fixtures and loose items to maintain an orderly presentation Room dressing is usually performed in: hotels; motels; offices; food courts; public areas; merchandising areas; hospital wards; lounges; etc. Room or area dressing is usually done as part of a daily cleaning routine GENERAL Environmental regulations are Federal; State or Local Government requirements on disposal of waste Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or on wall posters Personal protective equipment may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Client requirements and job specifications Room cleaning procedures: dusting, polishing, damp wiping Health and safety procedures Waste sorting and handling procedures

Manual handling Work planning and organisation



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

114

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consideration should be given to assessing consistency of outcome over a period of time. Candidates should therefore be given the opportunity to practise and undertake self-assessment of performance before formal assessments are undertaken. Underpinning knowledge may be inferred from observations of: • Selection and use of equipment, including electrical and hand tools used to extract and contain dust • Selection, use, cleaning and storage of equipment and materials • Selection of cleaning and polishing agents and their application to various surfaces and materials • Finish obtained in relation to the job specification and client expectations Additional information may be obtained from oral questioning, supervisors’ reports and customer satisfaction surveys, if necessary. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to follow simple written instructions relating to dusting and cleaning rooms and complete simple job reporting tasks Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant site(s), equipment and materials • Job specifications • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books • Job reporting forms • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL16A – Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

115


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL16A Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime.


1 Assess if work area is available for washing 1 Areas to be washed are identified from

client specifications or job instructions

2 A knowledge of soil types, surfaces and cleaning agents is used to determine if washing will be effective in cleaning the furniture and fittings

3 The work area has been cleared in advance to enable washing to proceed


2 Obtain washing implements 1 Suitable cleaning agent and equipment are selected based on an assessment of the type of surfaces and type of grime to be washed

2 Suitable protective clothing is obtained and checked to be in good working condition

3 Set up work area for washing 1 Drop sheets are placed during washing of furniture or fittings to catch excess cleaning solution or water

4 Spot clean heavily soiled surfaces 1 The type of mark or spot is identified accurately

2 The most effective chemical agent for the type or spot is selected and applied in a safe manner to manufacturers’ instructions and company requirements

3 Gloves and/or face masks are used in accordance with relevant health and safety requirements

4 Chemical agents are applied in sufficient quantities to soften spot without wastage or damage to surrounding area

5 All traces of the spot or mark are removed from the surface where possible



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

116

5 Apply diluted cleaning agent to furniture and fittings

1 Cleaning agent is distributed evenly on surface

2 Any spillage or splashing is cleaned up immediately to avoid damage to surrounding area

3 Surface is thoroughly rinsed in clean water before the cleaning solution dries to ensure surface is left smear free and without chemical residue

4 Washed surface is dried as required to remove all moisture




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Washing of furniture and fittings usually occurs as part of a periodic clean as required by client specification Cleaning agents are usually alkaline chemicals Occupational health and safety regulations can be State or Federal legislation; industry codes of practice or company procedures and policies Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance material referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ instructions are pre-printed on chemical containers; on company Safety Data Sheets; laminated safety cards or wall posters Washing implements can include: absorbent cloth; buckets; brushes; cleaning agents; spotting spray bottles etc. Clean up of washing implements can be done using manual or machine processes Cleaning agents can include commercial products or agents prepared by the company for the purpose This competency is usually performed after the client or another party has prepared the areas for washing Washable surfaces include: laminated; vinyl; enamel; sealed wood, plastic Non-washable surfaces include: polished timber



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

117

Leather furniture is usually cleaned with clear water and cloth only Personal protective equipment may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Client requirements and job specifications Washing procedures suitable for furniture and fittings Health and safety procedures

Manual handling Work planning and organisation Spot analysis and removal Incident reporting

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consideration should be given to assessing consistency of outcome over a period of time. Candidates should therefore be given the opportunity to practise and undertake self-assessment of performance before formal assessments are undertaken. Underpinning knowledge may be inferred from observations of: • Selection of chemicals and equipment pertinent to the job • Application of full strength or diluted cleaning agents to furniture and fittings • Cleaning and storage of equipment • Finish obtained in relation to job specifications Additional information may be obtained from oral questioning, supervisors’ reports and customer satisfaction surveys, if necessary. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to follow simple, written instructions relating to washing furniture and fittings and complete simple job reporting tasks Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant site(s), equipment and materials • Job specifications • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books • Job reporting forms • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

119


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition.

Amenities area cleaning is the maintenance of wet areas in a soil and hazard free condition with no distasteful or unpleasant odour.


1 Assess area to be cleaned 1 Area is available for cleaning without

disruption to client activities

2 The wet area is checked for health and safety hazards and appropriate action taken to avoid exposure to risk

3 The operation and condition of fixtures and fittings is checked and any maintenance requirements reported to supervisor

4 Areas requiring special attention, including graffiti, are identified

5 Suitability of area for hosing is determined


2 Set up work area 1 Materials and equipment to suit wet area layout and surface types are selected

2 All equipment is checked to be in good working condition and free from soil

3 Deodorising chemicals are obtained and handled in accordance with manufacturers’ and relevant health and safety requirements

4 Supplies of consumable items are obtained in quantities sufficient to replace normal usage

5 Items of protective clothing are obtained and checked to be in good working order

6 Area is decommissioned and suitable barricades and signs are put in place in accordance with relevant legislation, company policy and industry codes of practice

3 Remove soil from surface areas 1 All loose waste is removed from area prior to surface cleaning commencing

2 Cleaning solutions are applied to appropriate surfaces in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant health and safety requirements

3 Soil is removed from fixtures and fittings which are left in a smear free condition without chemical residue



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

120

4 Floors are left in a soil free condition with minimal surface water

5 All work is carried out in a safe manner in accordance with relevant OH&S, company and client requirements

6 Appropriate protective clothing is worn to protect against hazards of location, materials and equipment

7 Heavy soil, graffiti and stained surfaces are treated to restore appearance, or reported where further specialised treatment is necessary

8 Work is completed where possible at an exit point with floors being the last area cleaned

4 Replenish and replace consumables 1 The level of consumables is assessed and adjusted as required

2 Soiled items are laundered where appropriate




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Wet areas include: restroom; toilet; bathroom; change room; ensuite; spa; wash up area Specific areas such as kitchens; laundries; swimming pools; clinics; laboratories generally require special cleaning procedures A fixture may include: hand basin; sink; trough; cleaners sluice; toilet bowl and cistern; urinal (trough and wall); bidet; bath; spa; shower; vanity unit; mirror; hand dryer; paper dispenser; rack; tap; soap dispenser; rubbish receptacle



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

121

Surface types include: ceramics and porcelain; vinyl; terracotta; laminates; stone; glass; plastic; metal Material and equipment may include: absorbent cleaning cloths; all purpose neutral detergent; window cleaning agent; needle hazard disposal unit; mops; brooms; hose and nozzle Usually equipment is transported on a suitable 'cleaners trolley' Wet areas are usually cleaned individually Some work sites may require gender separation in restroom areas Hazards and risks may include: blood and blood products; slippery surfaces; loose electrical fittings; broken glass; high bacteria growths; needle stick injuries; cuts from sharp surfaces; inhaling fumes from strong cleaning agents, allergic reaction to cleaning agents Cleaning agents may include: neutral PH detergents; acidic toilet bowl cleaners for porcelain usage; graffiti remover Consumables include: paper towels; cloth towels; liquid and bar soap; personal toiletries where provided; toilet paper; deodorant blocks 'toilet lollies' Legislation includes the principal OHS Acts in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards of guidance referenced by such legislation Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or on wall posters Personal protective equipment may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Client requirements and job specifications Biological and viral control procedures Sterilizing procedures Enterprise health and safety policy and procedures Product knowledge WORKSAFE and EPA Codes of Practice

Waste sorting, storage and disposal techniques Work planning and organisation Disinfectant techniques Incident reporting Manual handling Dusting, cleaning, polishing and buffing Customer service and communication

Competence is to be demonstrated under workplace conditions. Consideration should be given to assessing consistency of outcome over a period of time. Candidates should therefore be given the opportunity to practise and undertake self-assessment of performance before formal assessments are undertaken. Underpinning knowledge may be inferred from observations of: • Planning and organising work to minimise risks to health, safety and environmental degradation • Selection of disinfectants, fungicides and other cleaning agents • Application of full strength or diluted solvents and other cleaning agents to treat wet areas • Cleaning and storage of equipment used in cleaning and disinfectant processes • Finish obtained in relation to job specifications • Hazard and incident reporting



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

122

Particular attention needs to be paid to : • Controlling public access to wet areas during cleaning • Managing the generation, handling and disposal of waste residues from the cleaning process • Attention to manufacturers’ directions for mixing compounds, especially caustic soda with water, and

bleaches with detergents • Tagging of damaged or exposed cords • Removal and handling of waste receptacles and soiled items Additional information may be obtained from oral questioning, supervisors’ reports and customer satisfaction surveys, if necessary. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to follow simple written instructions relating to wet area cleaning and complete simple job reporting tasks Basic numeracy includes the requirement to breakdown bulk chemicals and measure portions for preparing solvent/cleaning compounds. Other basic numeracy skills include the requirement to calculate and measure supplies needed to replenish consumables. Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant site(s), equipment and materials • Job specifications • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books • Job reporting forms • Manufacturers’ cleaning and storage specifications • Enterprise safety procedures

PRMCL18A Clean a unit or location to achieve a low bacteria condition.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

123


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL18A Clean a unit or location to achieve a low bacteria condition.

This unit applies to the utilisation of methods and procedures to achieve low bacteria conditions The unit may need to be associated with other units dealing with soil removal etc. when packaged in the work environment, for example, Unit PRMCL01, Maintain hard floor surfaces, Unit PRMCL17, Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition.


1 Ascertain the special requirements for

cleaning the low bacteria location 1 The availability of the area to be

cleaned using the required method is confirmed

2 Risks and hazards are identified and dangerous areas are reported immediately for further action

3 The priorities and special requirements for cleaning the area are identified through communication with the client

4 Client protocols for cleaning of the area are identified and planned for

5 Written notices, warning symbols and room conditions are observed and acted upon in accordance with client requirements

6 The responsibilities for cleaning are confirmed based on agreed client requirements


2 Select appropriate methods and procedures 1 The methods and procedures selected to produce the low bacteria outcome can be fully completed in the access time available

2 The application of relevant health regulation, code of practice and client requirements are met by the selected methods and procedures

3 Up to date documentation for the selected methods is obtained

3 Select and assemble tools and equipment 1 Tools and equipment selected are relevant to the type of low bacteria area and provide protection from identified risks

2 Equipment is selected in accordance with relevant signage systems, coding and manufacturers’ requirements



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

124

3 Equipment is assembled in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and checked to be in good working order

4 Chemicals are diluted in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and client protocols

5 Safety conditions are reviewed against relevant safety data sheets to ensure safe cleaning operations

6 New filters are installed where required to protect against any possible cross infection

4 Organised work to follow scheduled procedures

1 Waste types are recognised and removed in accordance with relevant company, client and legislative requirements to reduce risk of contamination or infection

2 Equipment and furniture are moved to provide clear access to cleaning site

3 Specialised equipment is isolated/removed from cleaning site in terms of client requirements to avoid any possibility of damage

5 Wear protective clothing where required 1 Protective clothing is fitted and secured properly to ensure safe and comfortable use

2 All external jewelry is removed or covered where it is a potential safety hazard

6 Apply selected procedures to low bacteria area

1 Machinery is used in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

2 Relevant OH&S requirements, industry codes of practice and client requirements are observed

3 Ongoing client activity and work in process is not interrupted

4 Suitable measures are taken to ensure cross contamination does not occur

5 Filters, pads and brushes are regularly checked for cleanliness and replaced as required to maintain the effectiveness of the cleaning procedures

6 Correctly diluted cleaning agent is applied to surfaces to enable reduction of bacteria in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

125

7 Adjust methods and procedures are adjusted to meet demands of the situation

1 The need to adjust procedures is assessed to protect the needs and safety of the client and operator

2 Delayed cleaning procedures are planned for followup to ensure required tasks are completed within required time limits

3 Equipment is relocated for cleaning where necessary to ensure completion of all procedures

4 The need for adjustments is reported or recorded to enable suitable followup to occur

8 Determine that the requirements of the applied procedures have been met

1 Cleaning procedures are signed off at end of the clean in accordance with client and company requirements

2 Cleaning is checked for effectiveness and repeated where necessary to achieve required results. Bacterial count tests are performed or arranged where specified

3 All reports are accurate and prepared without delay




10 Correct waste disposal methods are applied 1 Rapid flushing facilities are utilised for liquid disposal to aid dilution of waste in accordance with relevant water board regulations

2 Waste is disposed of in accordance with relevant environmental, health and safety and local government requirements

3 Contaminated wastes are isolated and coded in terms of required procedures and regulations

4 Wastes are removed as soon as possible from work site to minimise discomfort, contamination or leakage

5 Wastes are segregated where applicable



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

126

RANGE OF VARIABLES Cleaning types can be maintenance or terminal (carbolise) Environments may be: hospital wards or theatres, food processing areas (including industrial) Equipment may include: vacuum (wet and dry), polishers, scrubbers, lint free cloths, mops, buckets All equipment and materials are either disposable or suitable for chemical disinfection or autoclaving Rapid flushing materials include: sink or drain, slop hopper or sluice Chemicals in use are usually brand name neutral PH detergents Risks and hazards may include: infection; spillages; needle stick injuries; faulty equipment; waste mucous and membrane exposure; radioactivity; cytotoxic materials; chemical allergic reactions Documentation can be pre-printed schedules, protocols, checklists etc. Coding systems can be universal colour or symbol systems eg colour based (yellow) or sign (biohazard) Waste disposal and separation can be controlled by the client, Federal, State or local government regulation Waste types include: contaminated, biohazard, toxic, radioactive, chemical, metal recovery Procedure adjustments may follow from: workload levels; emergencies; lack of access; unsafe conditions; lack of personnel; interruptions (noise, physical etc) Manufacturers’ specifications and safety data are pre-printed on chemical containers, on safety data sheets, on laminated cards at the work site or wall posters Personal protective equipment may include: gloves, safety glasses, safety shoes, face masks, ear muffs/plugs, overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Immediate and chronic infection risks associated with common bacteria and viruses found in the workplace The main differences between bacteria and viruses Relevant OHS/Public Health Codes of Practice for application in the worksite Job specification and special needs Waste identification, sorting and isolation techniques Employer’s OHS policy and procedures

Application of OH&S hierarchies of control Apply cleaning protocols Explain and use warning symbols Apply sterilisation procedures Communication and problem solving



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

127

This unit may be assessed in conjunction with Unit PRM CL17: Maintain wet area in a deodorised, soil and hazard free condition and Unit PRM CL22: Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition Assessment should be by way of a practical demonstration under workplace conditions. The demonstration should be designed to require the candidate to demonstrate competence across the full range of performance criteria. It is recommended that learners have the opportunity to practise and that they undertake self-assessment or assessment by a person competent in low bacteria cleaning before being formally assessed by an independent assessor. Evidence of underpinning skill may be derived from observation of performance involving: • The identification of potential and actual sources of contamination in the workplace • The selection and application of an appropriate control measure to the source of contamination • The selection and use of an appropriate cleaning protocol, including methods of breaking down bulk

chemicals to apply to the contaminated site and surrounding areas • The identification and reporting of near misses and long-term risks associated with the cleaning requirements

of the worksite • Sterilising cleaning equipment between jobs Evidence of understanding (underpinning knowledge) may be derived from oral questioning of • The client’s reasons and requirements for cleaning the location • The purpose and use of written notices, warning symbols, personal protective equipment and Codes of

Practice relative to the room condition • The ability to seek and obtain additional information on potential and actual biological hazards in the worksite • Ways of preventing cross-contamination of work sites, work surfaces and materials Basic literacy requirements include the ability to recognise and decipher hazards signs and symbols associated with chemical, biological and radioactive agents and the ability to read and use relevant warning signs and labels. Resources Required for Assessment • Safety equipment, such as caution signs, protective equipment, masks, gloves, etc • Syringe sharp container(s) and disposal unit • Syringes • Codes of practice on infection control and disposal • Enterprise and client OH&S and cleaning policies and procedures, if relevant • Job specifications and procedure manuals (if relevant) • Cleaning equipment and materials, including anti-bacterial and anti-viral agents and relevant filters • Assessment instruments, record books, personal planners • Access to a suitable venue • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Material safety data sheets • Manufacturers’ equipment use and maintenance specifications

PRMCL19A – Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

129


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL19A Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area.


1 Obtain waste pickup equipment 1 Waste pickup equipment is checked to

be in good working order in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

2 Protective clothing appropriate to the type of waste to be collected is selected

3 Deodorising detergent agent is selected and handled in accordance with manufacturers’ and relevant OH&S requirements


2 Transfer waste to portable carrier 1 Waste is assessed for health and safety risks and handled in accordance with relevant company, client and OH&S requirements

2 Where required, waste receptacles and surrounds are spot cleaned

3 Soiled liners are replaced where required to minimise buildup of odour and maintain a soil free appearance

4 Waste-carrier is not overfilled to avoid spillage during transport and keep within specified weight limits

3 Deliver waste to disposal point 1 All waste is removed promptly from client area to avoid buildup of unpleasant odours

2 Waste is transported to disposal point by the shortest practical route and without spillage or damage to client premises

3 Manual lifting of waste carriers is carried out within relevant OH&S requirements

4 Mechanical lifting devices are fitted correctly to carrier and operated in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

130

5 Reports are made to supervisor of any hazardous waste identified or when disposal unit is full

4 Identify and sort waste where required 1 The components of the waste stream are identified accurately

2 Recyclable materials are identified and separated as appropriate




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Waste collection is usually conducted on a daily basis as part of a regular cleaning routine Cleaners removal of waste may involve sorting for recycling At some sites the contractor may also be involved in the transport of bulk or recyclable waste Toxic, other dangerous wastes or high security waste are usually dealt with by specialist removal contractors Waste is usually removed using a suitably designed waste bag on a cleaners trolley Disposal point for waste is normally specified by the client Disposal receptacles include: compactors; dumpmaster; large waste bins; open trucks Equipment can include: pick up trolley; wheelie bins (mobile garbage bins); cleaning cloths; cleaning agents; bin liners Waste types include: Contaminated/hazardous biological: blood and other human waste; syringes and needles; cytotoxic waste; soiled and disposable linen Chemical/metal: small machine replacement parts such as photocopying; printing; computing equipment General waste: wet and dry materials such as foodstuffs; drinks; paper; packaging materials Rubbish bin types include: recycle bins; general purpose bins; wet rubbish bins; restroom paper bins; needle hazard disposal units Legislation includes the principal OHS Acts in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards of guidance referenced by such legislation



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

131

Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on material safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or on wall posters Personal protective equipment may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Location of stores of waste pick up equipment Waste transfer procedures Waste identification and sorting Job specification and procedures OHS codes of practice Product knowledge, including types of waste pick-up equipment and materials

Manual handling Stores requisitioning Reporting, communication Equipment cleaning, storing and safe disposal Planning and organising work

Competence is to be demonstrated on the job over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. All safety equipment and procedures must be strictly observed. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of underpinning knowledge and skill may be obtained from observation of performance in relation to: • Planning and organising work • Breaking down the load • Selection and use of liners and waste storage receptacles which meet clients’ waste requirements • Reporting near misses and problems encountered on the job • Fitting and using mechanical lifting devices Supplementary evidence to indicate consistency of performance over time may be obtained from job reports and client satisfaction surveys. RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Access to a suitable venue, equipment and materials • Personal planners, assessment instruments and assessment records • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Job specifications • Equipment and material manufacturers’ operating specifications

PRMCL20A – Undertake pressure wash to remove excessive or oil based soil


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

133


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRM CL20 A Undertake pressure wash to remove excessive or oil based soil.

This unit is applicable to industrial and large public spaces including sports and entertainment venues.

The competency is related to the Unit PRM CL12, Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime, because of the use of water pressure jets in this work.

Work is conducted from ground level. The unit is associated with Unit PRM CL36, Carry out high level cleaning, where work is conducted above ground level.


1 Identify the suitability of pressure wash for

the area 1 Site availability and time are confirmed


2 The area, type and volume of soil are identified in order to assess the effectiveness and suitability of a pressure wash

3 Collection and disposal of pressure wash residue can be carried out in accordance with relevant environmental regulations


2 Obtain and set up equipment 1 A suitable cleaning agent is selected based on an assessment of the type of surfaces and type of soil to be washed

2 Cleaning agent is mixed where necessary at correct dilution and temperature as required by manufacturers’ specifications in accordance with safety requirements

3 All equipment is checked to be in good working order to manufacturers’ specifications

4 Secure and waterproof safety connections are used for all electrical fittings

5 Suitable nozzle configuration and extension equipment is used

6 Protective clothing is obtained and checked to be in good working condition

7 Area is signed and barricaded to restrict access to work area during cleaning in accordance with safety and company requirements



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

134

3 Prepare surface for cleaning 1 Surfaces are pre-applied where required with suitable chemical agent to assist in release of soil

2 Items requiring protection from pressure spray are covered as required

4 Apply pressure stream to area 1 Required safety equipment is worn in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant safety requirements

2 All cleaning agent is rinsed from area before drying to avoid discolouration

3 Pressure stream is applied from ground level only using a firm grip on pressure nozzle

4 Residual waste is directed to suitable disposal points in accordance with client requirements, relevant environmental legislation or company policy




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Pressure washers produce a variable stream of either water or cleaning agent The combination of high pressure and detergent enables fast and consistent washing process above manual methods Pressure washing is used as a replacement for hand scrubbing in large areas or where soil build up is high, oil based or encrusted Machines can be electric or petrol driven Cleaning agents can be usually neutral detergents of varying strengths, or either acid or alkaline to suit soil and surface type Areas that can be pressure washed include: front of building; external walls; steps; carparks; factory floors; entertainment seating; stairwells; industrial kitchens; selected machinery and equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

135

Pressure washing can cause damage to: cracked surfaces; painted or other sealed surfaces Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers; on company safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards at the work site or wall posters Personal protective equipment may include: gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs/plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Job specifications Procedures for preparing work areas for treatment OH&S procedures and codes of practice associated with the use of pressure jets Product knowledge

Selection of materials and equipment suited to the job Break-down and mixing of chemicals used Dexterity in setting up and using equipment Planning and organising work Communication and problem solving

This unit may be assessed with other, relevant units, including Unit PRM CL12, Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime, and Unit PRM CL36, Carry out high level cleaning. Competence is to be demonstrated on the job over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. All safety equipment and procedures must be strictly observed. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from observation of performance under workplace conditions, including: • Planning and organising the job and obtaining equipment and materials from stores • Applying safe work practices to the organisation of work • The finish obtained • Site clean-up and reporting • Obtaining additional information, if relevant. Evidence of consistency in performance over time and the ability to transfer the knowledge and skills required for performance in this unit, may be obtained from supplementary evidence, including supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Resources Required for Assessment • Job specifications • Manufacturers’ operating, cleaning and storage specifications • Enterprise procedures, including OH&S codes of practice • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and record books • Access to a suitable venue • Access to a registered provider of assessment services • Access to relevant plant, equipment and materials.

PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

137


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition.


1 Assess if industrial machinery is available for

cleaning 1 Site availability and time are confirmed


2 Machinery to be cleaned is identified from client specifications or job instructions

3 A knowledge of soil types, surfaces and cleaning agents is used to determine method of machine cleaning

4 The machine is decommissioned in advance to enable machine cleaning to proceed


2 Determine method of cleaning 1 Surface types are identified to enable suitable cleaning agents and application to be selected

2 The safe use of water on the machinery is confirmed to establish if wet or dry methods are required

3 Exposed electrical components are observed and methods to avoid contact with cleaning agents established

4 The extent of dust and possible use of air blowing methods are assessed

5 The availability of suitable drainage for cleaning residues is established

6 Manufacturers’ and client specifications, and relevant environmental regulations are reviewed to identify any restrictions on machinery cleaning

3 Prepare for cleaning 1 Surfaces are pre-applied with suitable chemical agents to loosen soil

2 Areas that could be damaged during the cleaning are covered to provide suitable protection

3 Suitable protective clothing is obtained and checked to be in good working condition



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

138

4 Remove soil from machinery 1 Soil is removed without interference with machinery switches or settings

2 Overspray and wipe down of electrical and other protected areas is avoided

3 Existing access platforms are used in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and relevant safety requirements

4 Appropriate extension tools are used to reach difficult access areas in a safe manner

5 Where required, air blower pressure is adjusted to ensure dust spread is minimised

6 Cleaned machinery is checked to ensure all traces of spots, marks and soil have been removed and spot cleaning undertaken if necessary to achieve this condition




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Types of machinery cleaned may include: food processing machines and equipment; concrete making machines; earth movers and similar plant; trucks; bottle making machines; welders Machine cleaning usually occurs in an industrial/manufacturing or mining environment Some machinery is specified by clients as 'not to be touched' by cleaning staff for safety and production reasons Contract cleaners are not usually involved in routine cleaning of 'in operation' machinery or in equipment maintenance procedures Machinery cleaning methods may include: hosing down; wash and wipe; air clean; brush down; scrub and wipe Damage can be caused through: paint removal; instigation of rust; electrical dampness; discolouration; filter damage



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

139

Protective clothing may include: overalls; rubber boots; gloves; goggles; face masks Manufacturers’ specifications and safety information are pre-printed on chemical containers and machinery plates; on company safety data sheets; on laminated safety cards on site or wall posters. Personal protective equipment may include: Gloves; safety glasses; safety shoes; face masks; ear muffs / plugs; overalls or as prescribed in regulations or by manufacturers of chemicals or equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Client requirements and job specifications Manufacturers’ operating and cleaning specifications Health and safety procedures Enterprise maintenance and servicing procedures

Manual handling Work planning and organisation Soil and grime analysis and removal Incident reporting Equipment decommissioning and recommissioning techniques Application of solvents and air blowers to grime removal

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consideration should be given to assessing consistency of outcome over a period of time. Candidates should therefore, be given the opportunity to practice and undertake self assessment of performance before formal assessments are undertaken. Underpinning knowledge may be inferred from observations of: • Planning and organising work to minimise risks to health and safety and environmental degradation • Selection of solvents and air blowing equipment pertinent to the job • Application of full strength or diluted solvents and other cleaning agents to industrial equipment • Cleaning and storage of equipment used in cleaning processes • Finish obtained in relation to job specifications Particular attention needs to be paid to : • Managing the generation, handling and disposal of waste residues from the cleaning process • Electrical isolation and use of machinery safety ‘lock-out’ systems • Tagging of damaged or exposed cords Additional information may be obtained from oral questioning, supervisors’ reports and customer satisfaction surveys, if necessary. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to follow simple written instructions relating to the work and complete simple job reporting tasks Basic numeracy includes the requirement to break down bulk chemicals and measure portions for preparing solvent/cleaning compounds. Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant site(s), equipment and materials • Job specifications • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books • Job reporting forms • Manufacturers’ cleaning and storage specifications • Enterprise safety procedures

PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource effectiveness.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

141


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource effectiveness.

This unit covers the organisation and monitoring of work within a work site or location.


1 Identify work requirements 1 Work site specifications are reviewed to

identify requirements

2 Clients’ needs and expectations are identified accurately

3 The site characteristics and any special requirements for cleaning are identified

2 Prepare equipment and materials 1 Consumables are estimated and made available in line with expected requirements

2 Equipment is checked to be in good working order to manufacturers’ specifications

3 Equipment required is made available to suit work needs

3 Allocate work areas and activities 1 Work is scheduled and allocated to be completed within time available

2 Work allocation to individuals matches known competency and capacity to complete work requirements

3 Work allocation occurs to meet resource targets

4 Communicate work requirements 1 Communication in a medium suitable to the situation is undertaken to ensure instructions are clear and understood

2 The understanding of the communication is verified and confirmed

5 Monitor work activity to meet specifications 1 Work activity is systematically monitored to ensure quality standards are met

2 Prompt followup occurs on difficult or known problem areas

3 Work is reallocated as required to ensure client and company requirements are met



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

142

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit is undertaken within the context of relevant industrial awards and/or other workplace requirements Work specification requirements may be negotiated with clients Work specifications may be: copy of contract documentation, derived schedules and/or rosters and/or checklists, building plans and area charts, client correspondence and/or other documentation Client expectations and needs may be verbal or written and usually checked against work specification requirements The competencies and capacity of existing workers are determined from observations, discussion, training records, demonstrations Estimates for time duration of work are determined by established standards Resource levels are usually negotiated for specific areas of responsibility and usually define discretionary levels in relation to expenditure areas

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Job specifications Additional client requirements Quality assurance procedures Scheduling and shift control Occupational Health and Safety requirements Industrial relations

Communication Basic literacy and numeracy Work organisation and time management Scheduling and rostering

Competence is to be demonstrated on the job over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. All safety equipment and procedures must be strictly observed. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of performance may be derived from observation of performance under workplace conditions, including: • Work planning and organising around job specifications. • Methods of dealing with incidents outside the candidate’s immediate area of responsibility • Methods of allocating tasks which include fairness and relevancy • Methods of identifying customer’s site requirements, including safety requirements Supplementary evidence of the ability to produce consistent outcomes over a period of time may be derived from oral questioning about information contained on job cards, supervisors’ reports, customer satisfaction surveys, schedules, rosters, check lists, client correspondence. A further option for off-the-job assessment may be by way of a work-related project supplemented by supervisor reports.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

143

Basic numeracy includes the ability to calculate estimates and plan the provision of resources. Basic literacy includes the ability to read and write legible instructions and job reports. Resources Required for Assessment Note: Information derived from enterprise procedures and practices should be treated as commercial-in-confidence. • Job and customer specifications • Access to relevant information and work sites • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books • Access to a suitable venue, equipment, materials and information about employment and rostering practices • Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

145


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships.

This unit applies to workplace relationships with staff.


1 Clearly communicate workplace expectations 1 Suitable communication medium is

adopted to suit context and staff


2 Implement relevant company and legislative workplace requirements

1 Information on legislative requirements and company policy is kept up to date and understood as provided from company sources

2 Relevant legislation and company policies are communicated to staff

3 Appropriate action to ensure compliance at the work site is implemented

3 Assist in resolving workplace conflict 1 Sources of conflict within the workforce are identified

2 Appropriate action is taken promptly to resolve conflict when identified

3 Resolution of conflict occurs within bounds of company policy

4 Facilitate development of staff 1 The development of staff in the work environment is encouraged

2 Opportunities for staff development training are communicated to staff

3 Appropriate opportunities are provided to develop the capacity and positive attributes of staff

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Suitable communication medium may include: face to face discussions; written instructions; signs and symbols; use of interpreter where required; company training; instructional materials; regular and one-off meetings Legislative and other workplace requirements may include: Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO); discrimination; sexual harrassment ; racial vilification; occupational health and safety; company policy and procedures; industrial awards and agreements

PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

146

Development of staff may involve: multiskilling; work rotation; opportunities for new responsibilities; development of customer relations; esteem and confidence building; workplace language skills; positive counselling; regular constructive feedback

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Role and function of workplace teams Enterprise communication structure and procedures Conflict management Staff development opportunities available

Interpersonal and team communication and negotiation Problem solving Listening and reporting Work planning and organisation

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from: Team assessments Demonstration of conflict management and resolution Demonstration of effective communication strategies Team implementation of legislative and corporate policies

Supplementary evidence may be obtained from oral questioning to ascertain the candidate’s level of understanding of: Stages of team development Causes of stress or conflict in teams Strategies for managing or reducing conflict in work teams Selection of appropriate communication and follow-up strategies General principles of staff development

Information derived from actual workplace experience should be treated as confidential.

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a relevant venue • Company procedures and policies • Assessment instruments, personal planners and record books • Relevant documentation • Access to a registered provider of assessment services and skilled facilitator

PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient workflow.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

147


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient workflow.

This unit covers the control of both consumables and cleaning equipment at the work location.


1 Maintain up to date technical knowledge 1 Information provided on materials and

equipment is reviewed to identify new or alternative approaches to improving productivity

2 Participation in relevant industry events occurs as requested to ensure product knowledge remains current

2 Where required, identify equipment and materials needed for site

1 Selection is based on a comparison of site characteristics against known capacity of equipment and materials

2 Selected equipment and materials are suitable for site characteristics

3 Maintain sufficient stock and equipment levels to meet work requirements

1 Usage levels are systematically estimated and monitored

2 Orders for stock or equipment maintenance are placed in advance of need to ensure continuous availability

3 Procedures for issue, return and recording of stock movement are developed and implemented

4 All stock records are kept accurately and up to date at all times

5 Equipment maintenance and service is organised to schedule to ensure availability is maintained and downtime minimised

4 Assess effectiveness of equipment and materials

1 Materials and equipment are regularly tested for fitness for purpose, productivity improvement, health and safety

2 Recommendations on usage are made where relevant

PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient workflow.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

148

RANGE OF VARIABLES Industry events include: product promotions, on and off site demonstrations, seminars, supplier training etc.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Product knowledge Stock control procedures and methods Quality assurance procedures Stores requisition and purchasing policy and procedures Safe storage and handling of hazardous materials

Functional literacy and numeracy Scheduling and time-management Negotiation and problem solving Cost:benefit assessment of products Inventory management

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from observation of performance under workplace conditions supplemented by oral questioning regarding: • Stock control • Product liability • Manufacturers’ warranties and • Equipment safety and operations testing • The safe handling and storage of potentially hazardous materials and equipment • Communication strategies Basic numeracy skills include simple calculations and cost:benefit analysis Basic literacy skills include the ability to read with understanding information provided by suppliers and to write reports on relevant, new products available on the market. Alternative options for assessment include evaluations of work-related projects, supplemented by self-assessment and supervisor reports. All information relating to enterprise policies and procedures should be treated as commercial-in-confidence. RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Access to a suitable venue, equipment and relevant requisition guidelines • At least two different job specifications and requisition orders • Manufacturers’ product specifications • Australian Standard 2508 – Safe storage and handling information for hazardous material • Access to relevant data bases or sources of information • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment records • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

149


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications.

This unit covers the preparation and presentation of quotations for work outside an existing contract arrangement.


1 Assess requests for variation 1 Status of request is assessed by

comparison against existing contract conditions

2 Work is assessed within company policy and relevant delegation of authority

3 The capacity to meet requests is determined accurately

4 Decision is taken on ability to respond or request is referred within company promptly

2 Prepare and present quotation 1 All job components are accurately estimated using company procedures where applicable

2 Company procedures for presentation and recording of quotation are followed

3 All documentation is accurately and promptly recorded

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Variations to contract may occur in these kind of situations: emergencies; new building work; irregular requirements (eg. window covering; shampoo carpet etc.) In some cases variations may be initiated by the contractor for consideration by the client

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Contractual requirements Job specifications

Negotiation Costing and estimating Literacy for business correspondence

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor.

PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

150

Evidence of competency may be derived from observations of performance under workplace conditions, or oral questioning of: • Reasons for requests • Understanding of the impact of proposed changes on agreed conditions and capacity for delivery • Enterprise policy and procedures for estimating and preparing quotations Supplementary evidence may be obtained from written quotes and correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Basic literacy requirements include the ability to draft understandable and unambiguous correspondence to customers. Basic numeracy includes the ability to calculate and provide written quotes on the cost of services or service variations. Information derived from enterprise policy or practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence. Resources Required for Assessment • Access to relevant data bases and information sources • Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books • Suitable venue in which to conduct the assessment, if relevant • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

151


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships.


1 Undertake proactive client liaison 1 Effective regular communication is

established with client

2 Staff are encouraged to develop effective and friendly relationships with client and facility users

3 Prompt action is taken on feedback received from client

4 Additional cleaning activities that will met client needs are raised for consideration by client

2 Identify client needs 1 Regular discussions with client regarding needs and expectations are held

2 Feedback on performance and level of satisfaction is sought

3 Company advice on contract and/or variations is reviewed and understood

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Client liaison may include: telephone and fax communication; face to face discussions; exchange of reports and information; regular meetings with client representatives; site news sheet; communications book; programmed inspections by client

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Principles of customer service Enterprise procedures Job specifications

Listening and reporting Time management Planning and organising work Interpersonal and team communication

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements.

PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

152

Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency in customer service may be derived from: • Observations of customer:candidate interaction in a given work situation • Complaints records and procedures • Job reports • Client satisfaction surveys • Repeat business • Role plays and relevant audiovisual material

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue • Assessment instruments • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

153


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work.


1 Determine suitable team work roles 1 Information on work requirements,

specifications and company requirements is identified by the team leader

2 Where appropriate, work roles of team members are determined in a co-operative manner

2 Plan team activities 1 Where relevant, team members are given the opportunity to participate in planning work activities

2 The existing competency and capacity of team members is considered in determining level and type of input to work planning

3 Team members understand the inter related nature of the team’s work activities

4 Team objectives are shared and understood by team members

3 Contribute to effective team work 1 Forms of communication appropriate to activities are adopted by the team

2 Individual responsibilities are assigned for activities as part of a full job plan

3 Where appropriate, assistance in completing activities is provided to achieve required team outcomes

4 Problems are discussed and resolved where possible through agreed and accepted processes

4 Monitor and review team performance 1 Processes for team performance review are developed in a participative manner

2 Relevant data is collected on a regular basis

3 Data is analysed and reviewed and information on performance provided to relevant parties

PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

154

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Applies to all contexts where work is undertaken in teams Team leaders would normally be provided with objectives, parameters, specification/contract details However, some interpretative work is required under guidance and/or training In some situations, the competency may be required working with groups of peers Team members may come from a variety of backgrounds, levels of experience and competency Data may be verbal, visual and anecdotal information collected during operations

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Role and function of workplace teams Employee support systems in the organisation The structure, key functions and business goals of the enterprise The purpose and structure of equal employment opportunities legislation

Interpersonal communication and negotiation Problem solving Work planning and organisation Team building

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from: • Team assessments • Demonstration of conflict management and resolution Supplementary evidence may be obtained from oral questioning to ascertain the candidate’s level of understanding of: • Recruitment practices and their effects have on team dynamics • Stages of team development • Causes of stress or conflict in teams • Strategies for managing or reducing conflict in work teams If role plays are used in assessment, candidates should be assisted by a skilled facilitator to debrief the candidate and bring them out of role. Information derived from actual workplace experience should be treated as confidential. Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a relevant venue • Company procedures (if relevant) • Assessment instruments, personal planners and record books • Relevant documentation • Access to a registered provider of assessment services and skilled facilitator

PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

155


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace.

This unit is based on Generic Competency B as recommended by Worksafe Australia July 1994.


1 Provide information to the work group about

relevant OHS matters 1 Relevant provisions of OHS legislation

and codes of practice are accurately and clearly explained to the work group

2 Information on relevant OHS policies, procedures and programs is provided in a readily accessible manner to the work group

3 Information about identified hazards and the outcomes of risk assessment and control procedures is regularly provided and clearly explained to the workgroup

2 Implement and monitor participative arrangements for the management of OHS at the work site

1 Company procedures for consultation over OHS issues are implemented and monitored to ensure that all members of the work group have the opportunity to contribute

2 Issues raised through consultation are resolved promptly or referred for resolution in accordance with company policy and legislative requirements

3 The outcomes of consultation over OHS issues are made known to the work group promptly

3 Implement and monitor procedures for identifying hazards and assessing risks

1 Existing and potential hazards in the work area are identified and reported so that risk assessment and control procedures can be applied

4 Implement and monitor procedures for controlling risks

1 Work procedures to control risks are implemented and adherence to them by the work group is monitored in accordance with company policy and legislative requirements

2 Existing risk control measures are monitored and results reported regularly

3 Inadequacies in existing risk control measures are identified and reported in accordance with company and legislative requirements

4 Inadequacies in resource allocation for implementation of risk control measures are identified and reported as required by company policy



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

156

5 Implement procedures for dealing with hazardous events

1 Workplace procedures for dealing with hazardous events are implemented whenever necessary to ensure that prompt control action is taken

2 Hazardous events are investigated to identify their cause

3 Control measures to minimise risks of hazardous events recurring are implemented

6 Implement and monitor procedures for providing OHS training

1 OHS training needs are identified accurately

2 Arrangements are made for fulfilling identified OHS training needs in both on and off-the-job training programs in consultation with relevant parties

7 Implement and monitor procedures for maintaining OHS records

1 OHS records for work areas are accurately and legibly kept in accordance with relevant company and legislative requirements

2 Aggregate OHS information is used to identify hazards and monitor risk control procedures

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Generic Competency B describes generic OHS competencies applicable to employees with supervisory responsibilities To be exhibited in the work area of responsibility: In accordance with all relevant OHS legislation; particularly: general duty of care; requirements for the maintenance and confidentiality of records of occupational industry and disease; provision of information and training; regulations and codes of practice relating to hazards present in work area; health and safety representatives and OHS committees; issues resolution In accordance with workplace procedures for: inspection; housekeeping; consultation processes; either general or specific in OHS; training and assessment; specific hazard policies and procedures; OHS information; OHS record keeping; maintenance of plant and equipment; purchasing of supplies and equipment; counseling/disciplinary processes Hazardous events include: accidents; fire and emergencies such as chemical spills or bomb scares Procedures for dealing with them include: first aid; evacuation; chemical containment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

157

Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory; relevant regulations and codes of practice; the relevant national OHS standards and Australian Standards or guidance material referenced by such legislation

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Duty of Care provisions applying to individuals and employers in Federal and State OH&S legislation Team building Enterprise policy and procedures for OH&S Workers compensation reporting procedures Hierarchy of risk control and elimination Job specifications Manufacturers’ equipment and material storage, use, cleaning and disposal guides Enterprise risk management strategies Principles of Housekeeping Emergency procedure

Identification of sources of risk to health and safety Near miss notification Basic literacy and numeracy Chemical and manual handling techniques Fitting, cleaning and storage of personal protective equipment Work organisation and planning Working in teams Reporting of health and public safety risks

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. OH&S safety requirements must be observed at all times. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from: • Documentation, including near miss reports, job reports, agendas and minutes of OH&S committee meetings

(if relevant) • Practical demonstration of hazard control at source, with particular reference to the control of chemicals • Practical demonstration of emergency procedures Supplementary evidence may be obtained from oral discussions regarding: • Personal and management responsibilities for OH&S • The role and responsibility of workplace health and safety delegates and/or committees • The value of job specifications in identifying and controlling hazards • The importance of having an OH&S policy and procedures in place to identify and control hazards • The value of good housekeeping based on work planning and management • Reasons why personal protective equipment is used and how PPE should be maintained • Enterprise procedures for reporting and recording injuries • The value of material safety data sheets • Sources of information on OH&S • Safe work practices Basic literacy requirements include the ability to read and interpret symbols and codes used as hazard identification in the workplace(s) in which work is performed. Basic numeracy requirements include the ability to calculate height, volume and estimate area.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

158

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue, equipment and materials • Relevant documentation, including OH&S policy and procedures • Relevant codes of practice and material safety data sheets • Manufacturers specifications for plant and equipment • Assessment instruments, including personal planner and assessment record books

BSX0008/1 – Prepare for Training


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

159


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT BSX0008/1 Prepare for training.

This unit is the same as Prepare for Training from the Category 1 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).

Category 1 applies to those people who provide training in the workplace, but for whom the training function is not a major part of their job.


1 Confirm the need for training 1 The specific training need is identified

or advised by appropriate personnel

2 The specific training need is confirmed with appropriate personnel

3 The training objectives reflect the specific training need

2 Plan and document training session 1 Training outcomes are clearly stated

2 Steps in the training session follow a logical sequence

3 The training method/s selected are appropriate for the training outcomes, trainee characteristics and availability of equipment and resources

4 Plans for practice by trainees are made

5 Provision for monitoring trainees progress is made

6 Evidence required for assessment and how it will be collected is stated

3 Arrange locations and resources 1 Resources required for training are identified and approved by appropriate personnel

2 Suitable locations for the training are arranged

3 The equipment, tools and other resources required are organised to be available when needed

4 Arrangements are made with any people who are required to help in the training session or in the follow-up to the training session



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

160

5 Hazards, accessibility and level of risk associated with training are identified and suitable control measures adopted in accordance with company policy and relevant legislation

4 Notify trainees 1 Trainees are notified of the time and place of the training session

2 Trainees’ supervisor(s) are notified of the time and place of any other requirements for the training session

3 The purpose of the training is notified to all involved

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Standards can include: standards set by the work group; organisational policies and procedures; specified work standards; statutory legislation Training may be initiated by: implementation of new work practices and services; organisational restructures; introduction of new technology; identification of performance problems; self-initiated to address performance problems; identified need; or provide development Type of forums for discussion and decision making may include staff and informal meetings The following statements relate to pest management industry context. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Appropriate personnel may include: supervisor; staff; management; company advisors; licensing bodies Equipment and resources may include: session materials; examples of work; exhibits; media display equipment; writing board Accessibility may include: means of access and egress; cost Training hazards may include: use of live examples; use of active pesticides; ongoing client/user activity in the training environment; ergonomic considerations; use of protective and safety equipment Suitable locations may be: on job; off job; through electronic open learning methods Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS; public health; environmental; parks and wildlife; pesticide controls; industrial; consumer protection; trade practices; equal opportunity; anti-discrimination; freedom of information; industry codes of conduct; relevant Australian standards



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

161

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Training principles and methods Subject matter Assessment methods EEO principles Relevant OHS standards Audiovisual equipment operation

Report writing Planning Scheduling Organising Contingency Communication

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit is best obtained by observation of the preparation, combined with discussion with the trainer about what has been done. Evidence sought may include: explanation of the specific training need and how it was determined; the trainer's view of appropriate personnel; an outline of the training session; preferably in writing; explanation of the training method(s) selected; recognition of trainee characteristics (e.g. language and literacy/numeracy skills; cultural background; previous experience); knowledge of possible training locations within the workplace; knowledge of relevant safety and health standards to be observed; evidence that trainees and their supervisor know about training arrangements made

BSX0008/2 Deliver training.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

163


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT BSX0008/2 Deliver training.

This unit is the same as the unit ‘Deliver Training’ in the Category 1 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).

Category 1 applies to those people who provide training in the workplace but for whom the training function is not a major part of their job.

ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 1 Prepare trainees 1 The objectives of the training session are

explained to and discussed with the trainees

2 The sequence of activities to be followed in the training session is explained to trainees

3 Trainees are made aware of the place of the work application of the skill or job being taught

4 Any barriers to the performance of the job being taught are identified and discussed with trainees

5 The assessment process is explained to trainees

2 Instruct trainees 1 A systematic approach is taken to instruction, taking into account explanation, demonstration, review, trainee explanation, trainee demonstration and feedback

2 Instruction process is revised and modified as necessary to meet the trainees' learning needs

3 Trainees are encouraged by positive comments from the trainer

4 Feedback during instruction is designed to help trainees learn from their mistakes

5 Trainees are encouraged and guided to evaluate their own performance and diagnose it for improvement

3 Provide opportunities for practice 1 Practice opportunities are provided according to the specific learning situation and the training objectives

2 Constructive feedback and reinforcement are provided during practice



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

164

3 Trainees' readiness for assessment is monitored

4 Confirm trainee has reached required standard of performance

1 Evidence of satisfactory performance by the trainee is collected in accordance with the training session plan

2 The trainee is advised that he/she has reached the required standard of performance

3 Other appropriate personnel are advised that the trainee has reached the required standard of performance

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Standards can include: standards set by the work group, company policy and procedures, specified work standards, statutory legislation Training may be initiated by: implementation of new work practices and services, organisational restructures, introduction of new technology, identification of performance problems, self-initiated to address performance problems, identified need or to provide development The following statements relate to pest management industry context. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Instruction process may include: one to one, small group, large group Practice opportunities may include: practical application, simulated, under direction supervision, in controlled environments Appropriate personnel may include: supervisor, staff, management, company advisors, licensing bodies Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Training principles and methods Subject matter Presentation techniques Audiovisual materials and equipment operation Relevant acts, regulations and codes of practice OHS requirements EEO requirements

Instruction Presentation Planning Questioning Time management



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

165

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance is best obtained by observation of training delivery on a number of occasions. If this is not possible, then at least one direct observation should be supported by supplementary evidence, such as confirmation by a supervisor or discussions with trainees.

BSX0008/3 Review training.

PRM98A Asset Maintenance Training Package 167 © Australian National Training Authority (ANTA) 1998

Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT BSX0008/3 Review training.

This unit is the same as ‘Review Training’ from the Category 1 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).


ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 1 Evaluate training session 1 Trainees are encouraged to raise

problems or difficulties with any aspect of the training session

2 Trainees are asked to discuss their ability to apply the learning outcomes

3 Trainees' reaction to the training session is sought

4 Own performance is reviewed against session objectives and in response to trainees' comments

5 Review comments are summarised

6 The results of the evaluation are used to guide further training

2 Record training 1 The details of the trainees who have completed the training are accurately recorded according to the organisation's requirements

2 Other records as required by legislation or agreement are kept

3 Records are released to authorised personnel only

4 Records are securely stored

3 Provide information on training 1 Information on training proposed, in hand or completed is provided to management as required

2 Information on proposed training is provided to prospective trainees on request

3 Information on appropriate, available training is provided to employees on request



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

168

RANGE OF VARIABLES Standards can include: standards set by the work group, organisational policies and procedures, specified work standards, statutory legislation Training may be initiated by: implementation of new work practices and services, organisational restructures, introduction of new technology, identification of performance problems, self-initiated to address performance problems, identified needs, or provide development The following statements relate to pest management industry context. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Problems and difficulties may include: pace of training, learning difficulties, level of materials used, relevant to work Training records may include: logbooks, attendance sheets, assessment records, manual or computer based systems Information on training may include: company training schedules, training brochures, course outlines and summaries Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Evaluation methods Company policy and procedures relating to training records Available training

Record keeping Analytical Self assessment Questioning Group discussion

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit should best be a combination of observation of the trainer's review with the trainees, an inspection of records and discussion with the trainer about his or her appreciation of the session. Where direct observation is not possible, discussion with the trainees might be a substitute. Evidence sought may include: knowledge of the organisation's record keeping arrangements and security and access procedures

PRMCL32A Recruit and appoint staff to meet work requirements.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL32A Recruit and appoint staff to meet work requirements.


1 Identify staffing requirements 1 Staffing needs are determined from an

analysis of work specifications and skill requirements

2 Requirements are identified in accordance with applicable legislation and company policy

3 Requirements to meet possible contingencies are estimated

2 Select staff to meet requirements 1 Staff are recruited to meet identified needs in accordance with relative legislation, company and industry practice

2 Selection is based on objective criteria and is transparent

3 Appoint and induct staff 1 Staff are appointed in accordance with company policy

2 New staff are given all necessary documentation related to their employment and their understanding confirmed

3 All staff induction documentation is computed and checked

4 Staff undertake a suitable company and site induction program as soon as possible after appointment

5 Followup with new staff is scheduled to check progress

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Staffing may be permanent; part-time or casual Relevant legislation may be awards or other workplace agreements Staffing requirements may cover different categories of cleaner; specialisations; leading hand and/or supervision requirements Legislation relating to employment may be State or Federal and cover Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO); various discrimination Acts; Health and Safety; relevant licensing where applicable

PRMCL32A Recruit and appoint staff to meet work requirements.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

170

Selection methods may include: referral; job advertisement; interview; practical demonstration; review of prior experience Induction training may include: supervised tour of facilities; equipment usage; company policy and procedures manual; health and safety information; formal introduction to work team; completion of company and other employment documents (eg. tax) etc.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill The structure and application of awards in contracts of employment Additional regulatory provisions affecting employment contracts Enterprise policy and procedures for recruitment and termination of employment Job specifications Enterprise personnel recording procedures

Personnel record-keeping Recruitment Team management Interpersonal and negotiation skills Problem solving Work planning and management Record keeping Report writing

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. Enterprise recruitment and legal obligations outlined in recruitment and employment procedures must be observed at all times Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from: • Prepared projects, including relevant examples of documentation held on recruitment, e.g. job ads, job

interview records, personnel records and job cards • Observation of performance in a role play about the recruitment and selection of personnel Supplementary evidence of underpinning knowledge may be derived from questions about: • Award provisions applying to the position or functions to be performed in the position for which staff are being

recruited • Enterprise procedures affecting recruitment and induction of staff • Internal and external sources of information about employment conditions and issues affecting employment • Employee and employer obligations and rights under general contracts of employment and award provisions Basic literacy skills include the ability to read relevant ‘plain English’ policy and procedure documents and obtain information from relevant sources. Basic numeracy skills include the ability to accurately calculate pay and authorised deductions, based on information provided in job cards. Information used in assessments should not be drawn from existing personnel records.

RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Enterprise policy and procedure manuals (if relevant) • Relevant awards and codes • Prepared evidence • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL33A – Plan for safe and efficient cleaning activities


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL33A Plan for safe and efficient cleaning activities.

This unit has application in a variety of cleaning contexts.


1 Assess the cleaning situation 1 Health and safety hazards are identified

so that suitable precautions can be taken

2 The availability of work areas to be cleaned is determined

3 The variety and complexity of the work is assessed against available equipment and competency

4 The need for team work and/or suitable supervision is considered within company and/or legislative requirements

5 The client specifications for cleaning of the area are identified

6 Situations with immediate serious safety or operational impact are reported without delay prior to work recommencing

2 Identify possible work restrictions 1 Factors that may require alteration to work schedules are identified and solutions sought

3 Select and plan for a suitable work method 1 Methods are selected that ensure the work can be completed efficiently and safely

2 Work methods are logical and methodical

3 Methods are selected that minimise damage to facility users’ environment, work in progress, furniture or fittings

4 Work is planned to reduce interruption to ongoing facility users’ activity

4 Report on variations 1 Variations to work situation and methods that impact on safety or performance are reported in accordance with company and legislative requirements



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

172

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Assessment of cleaning situation may include: amount of cleaning required to be completed; size and condition of site; type and suitability of equipment; number and skills of cleaners available for the work; client specifications; health and safety matters etc. Possible work restrictions include: dangerous site; client activity; poor equipment and facilities; skills of work team; volume of cleaning anticipated Work methods may include: preferred company procedures; methods adapted to the context; routines developed over a period and found to be effective Reports may be: verbal or written

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill OH&S and housekeeping practices Enterprise quality assurance procedures Job specifications Customer quality assurance requirements Manufacturers’ operating specifications for materials and equipment

Work planning and organisation Basic literacy and numeracy Interpersonal communication Team work Time management Identification of specific cleaning requirements Identification of hazards Risk management

This unit may be assessed in combination with other relevant units. Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. OH&S safety requirements must be observed at all times. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency in planning and organising work may be derived from: • Job records and reports • Selection of equipment and materials relevant to the job • Finish obtained in relation to job specifications • Supervisor reports and customer satisfaction surveys Supplementary evidence may be obtained from oral discussions about • Reasons why a given approach was selected in preference to others • Possible causes of damage to property or persons that could result from incorrect or inappropriate work

practices Evidence of ability to transfer the skills and knowledge contained in this unit to other situations may be obtained from supervisor reports (if relevant) and customer service surveys.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Basic literacy requirements include the ability to prepare legible job cards; time sheets and near miss reports (if relevant). Basic numeracy requirements include the ability to calculate and obtain materials and equipment relevant to the job.

RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR ASSESSMENT • Access to a relevant venue, equipment and materials • Relevant documentation, including job specifications • Assessment instruments, including personal planners and assessment record books

PRMCL34A Follow relevant OHS policies and procedures to ensure own safety and that of others.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL34A Follow relevant OHS policies and procedures to ensure own safety and that of others.

This unit is based on generic competency A as recommended by Worksafe Australia, June 1994.


1 Follow workplace procedures for hazard

identification and risk control 1 Hazards in the work area are

recognised and reported to designated personnel according to workplace procedures

2 Workplace procedures and work instructions for controlling risks are followed accurately

3 Workplace procedures for dealing with accidents, fire and emergencies are followed whenever necessary within scope of responsibilities and competencies

2 Contribute to participative arrangements for the management of OHS

1 OHS issues are raised with designated personnel in accordance with workplace procedures and relevant OHS legislation

2 Contribution to participative arrangements for OHS management in the workplace are made within organisational procedures and scope of responsibilities and competencies

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Generic Competency A describes generic OHS competencies applicable for employees without supervisory or managerial responsibilities It involves application of relevant OHS legislation, and codes of practice including duties and responsibilities of all parties under general duty of care Legislation includes the principal OHS Act in each State and Territory, relevant regulations and codes of practice, the relevant national OHS Standards and Australian Standards or guidance material referenced by such legislation Relevant workplace procedures will include: OHS policies, hazard identification, risk assessment and control, emergency, fire and accident procedures, procedures for the use of personal protective clothing and equipment, job procedures and work instructions

PRMCL34A Follow relevant OHS policies and procedures to ensure own safety and that of others.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

176

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Duty of Care provisions applying to individuals and employers in Federal and State OH&S legislation Team building Enterprise policy and procedures for OH&S Workers compensation reporting procedures Hierarchy of risk control and elimination Job specifications Manufacturers’ equipment and material storage, use, cleaning and disposal guides Enterprise risk management strategies Principles of Housekeeping Emergency procedure

Identification of sources of risk to health and safety Near miss notification Basic literacy and numeracy Chemical and manual handling techniques Fitting, cleaning and storage of personal protective equipment Work organisation and planning Work in teams Reporting of health and public safety risks

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. OH&S safety requirements must be observed at all times. Competency may need to be assessed in conjunction with units relating to other cleaning competencies where OHS is integrated into performance requirements. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency in customer service may be derived from: • Documentation of near misses or accident reports • Practical demonstration of hazard control at source, with particular reference to the control of chemicals • Practical demonstration of emergency procedures Supplementary evidence may be obtained from oral discussions regarding: • Personal and management responsibilities for OH&S in the workplace • The role and responsibility of workplace health and safety delegates and/or committees • The usefulness of the enterprise’s OH&S policy and procedures • The value of good housekeeping • Reasons why personal protective equipment is used and how PPE should be maintained • Enterprise procedures for reporting and recording work-based injuries • The value of material safety data sheets • Sources of information on OH&S • Safe cleaning practices Basic literacy requirements include the ability to read and interpret symbols and codes used as hazard identification in the workplace(s) in which work is performed. Basic numeracy requirements include the ability to calculate height and volume and estimate area. Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue, equipment and materials • Relevant documentation, including OH&S policy and procedures • Relevant codes of practice • Manufacturers’ specifications for plant and equipment and material safety data sheets • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area.

The unit can be applied to the maintenance of a cleaner's room or store.


1 Maintain area in a clean, tidy and secure

condition 1 Equipment is stored in a clean dry

condition in an easily accessible and well ventilated location in accordance with company policy

2 Free work space is kept clear and free from obstacles

3 Waste is regularly removed

4 Area is secured from public access at all times to secure equipment and prevent unauthorised access to chemicals

2 Control and maintain stocks of consumables 1 Minimum and maximum stock holding levels are identified from usage patterns in accordance with company policy

2 Stock holding levels are regularly checked and stock reordered to maintain required levels

3 Chemicals are stored in accordance with relative OHS, company and environmental requirements

4 Decanting and diluting of chemicals is done in a well ventilated location in accordance with OHS requirements and manufacturers’ specifications

5 All chemical containers including work bottles are clearly labelled, in good working order and are coded as appropriate

6 Reactive chemicals are kept in a secure location in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and isolated from other reactive agents

3 Maintain and display cleaning site information

1 Relevant charts, symbols and instructions are displayed or otherwise made clearly accessible

2 Information is filed in like categories for easy retrieval

3 Site communication devices are regularly reviewed and responses given



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

178

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to persons whose major function is cleaning, not storekeeping Cleaning storage area may be a room, storage cupboard or other area separate from normal client functions The area may include: equipment storage bays; chemical cupboard; slop sink; desk; clothes rack etc. Information may include: safety data check sheets; clients specifications and schedules; company procedures and policies; OHS regulations; job descriptions; time sheets; work instructions; colour codes; communication books; manufacturers instructions; operation manuals; first aid box etc. Site communication devices include: white boards; notice boards; communication books

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Stores management Stock control

Basic numeracy and literacy at a level required to calculate product requirements, including mixing dilution rates and storage requirements Planning and organising Record-keeping Communication Interpret manufacturer or enterprise guidelines on storage requirements, including information presented in graph and diagram form

Competence is to be demonstrated over the full range of performance criteria. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time should form the basis for assessing the practical job requirements. Opportunities for practice and self-assessment under the guidance of a person deemed to be competent in the work area should be provided in advance of a formal assessment by an independent assessor. Evidence of competency may be derived from: • Inspections of storage facilities • Storage and housekeeping practices, especially those involving the separation and coding of various types of

chemicals • Facilities and procedures for collecting, sorting and disposing of waste materials • Ease of access to, and accuracy of, stock control records Supplementary evidence of underpinning knowledge may be obtained from oral questioning about: • Health and safety problems associated with inappropriate labelling or ventilation of stores areas • Secure hand-over procedures • Relevant documentation for stores control, including manufacturers’ specifications, job cards, certificate of

inspections (if relevant), maintenance recording systems, goods received summary, service manuals, environmental procedures, quality manuals

Basic literacy includes the ability to read and interpret job specifications and stores control records. Basic numeracy includes the ability to calculate and obtain from stores, the equipment and materials required for a given job.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Resources Required for Assessment • Access to a suitable venue, including stores and stores records • Relevant documentation • Assessment instruments, personal planners and assessment record books • Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMCL36A – Carry out high level cleaning


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD CL Cleaning

UNIT PRMCL36A Carry out high level cleaning.

This unit can be applied in a range of contexts where high level cleaning is performed.


1 Assess site and determine method 1 High level site is assessed for relevant

health and safety risks and hazards

2 Accessibility to site is confirmed with appropriate parties

3 High level access method is selected to enable safe access that is appropriate to the site conditions

4 Dangerous hazards are reported promptly and cleaning delayed where risk of injury or damage is identified

5 Personnel have current and relevant licences as prescribed by legislation to operate equipment and carry out the work

2 Set up site and equipment 1 Site access is restricted, barricaded and signed in accordance with relevant industry codes of practice, legislation and company policy

2 All equipment is assembled in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and tested prior to use

3 Relevant equipment safety test documentation is sighted where appropriate

4 All equipment needs are assembled for the work to ensure it is available at the high level site when required

3 Perform high cleaning operations 1 All cleaning operations are carried out in accordance with relevant occupational health and safety requirements

2 Equipment is used strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications

3 Regular checks are made to ensure any fail-safe devices are secure and operational

4 Cleaning is conducted in teams of two or more where required by relevant legislation, company policy and industry codes of practice



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

182

4 Clean site and store equipment 1 Site is returned to full access on completion of cleaning

2 All equipment is cleaned and packed for storage in accordance with manufacturers’ requirements

3 Equipment is stored in an accessible location ready for reuse

4 All equipment is secured against inappropriate use

RANGE OF VARIABLES

High level cleaning covers all cleaning above normal reach (usually 2 metres) and can be internal or external High level access equipment can include ladders, extension ladders, motorised gantry, absailing equipment, scaffolding etc. High level cleaning usually occurs where manual 'hands on' cleaning is required to be performed at high locations Examples of high level cleaning include: external window cleaning, industrial machinery, vaulted ceiling environments, ceiling detailing, building sites etc.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Product knowledge Enterprise and client job specifications, Access requirements Enterprise and client safety regulations and safe work practices Cleaning techniques Equipment and materials storage procedures

Planning and organising work Manual handling Waste minimisation Customer service Finding and using information Team work Decanting chemicals

This unit may be assessed in combination with Unit PRM CL10: Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings, Unit PRM CL11: Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks, and Unit PRM CL12: Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime. Competency is to be demonstrated through a single, practical, demonstration over the full range of performance criteria to the standard required in the workplace. Consistency of outcomes over a period of time may be achieved by observation in conjunction with supplementary evidence provided by supervisor reports and client satisfaction survey reports. It is recommended that candidates have the opportunity to undertake self-assessment before being formally assessed.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Underpinning knowledge may be determined from observation of: • The selection and use of protective clothing, equipment and techniques appropriate for ceiling cleaning • Compliance with Australian Bureau of Standards and WORKSAFE Australia Codes of Practice for the safe

use of ladders • The application and use of cleaning solutions and vacuum cleaners in areas which are difficult to access • The cleaning and safe disposal/storage of equipment and materials used in the process • The application and removal of rinsing solutions from ceiling surfaces • The finish achieved in relation to the job specification • Safety checks carried out on equipment before, during and after the job is completed Additional evidence may be obtained from oral questioning of: • Reasons why certain techniques were used in preference to others • Reasons for the disposal of some materials and equipment and cleaning and storage of others • Reasons for erecting signs and barricades and working in teams in certain work areas • Procedures required for reporting accidents and near-misses • Sources of information on first aid Resources Required for Assessment • Material safety data sheets • Accident report forms • Area for demonstration • Safety equipment, such as signs and barricades • Drop cloths, protective clothing and equipment • Ladders, cobwebbers, vacuum cleaners and non-abrasive dust heads • Equipment cleaning implements • Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM01A Respond to customer enquiry.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00


FIELD PM Pest Management

UNIT PRMPM01A Respond to customer enquiry.

This unit has application where office based and/or telephone enquiries for pest management services are received.


1 Identify nature and type of enquiry 1 Client is addressed in a courteous and

business like manner

2 Client requirements and degree of urgency are established promptly

3 Impact of relevant legislation or company policy for dealing with enquiry and ability to respond are identified

4 Enquiries requiring additional research are allocated a priority and arrangements made for followup

2 Research information relevant to enquiry 1 Information relevant to client needs is identified from company and industry sources

2 Accuracy and type of information available from client is assessed to determine if an on-site inspection is required

3 Probability of associated problems and cohabitation of pests is assessed from the information available

3 Determine suitable response 1 Response to the enquiry is prepared within company time requirements

2 Need for written or verbal response is established in accordance with company requirements and nature of enquiry

3 Client is provided with options for pest management where appropriate

4 Communicate advice and pricing information 1 Written and verbal responses are presented in clear and simple terms so that they can be understood

2 Pricing information is provided for routine and specified treatments where these match with client requirements

3 Client requirements for followup information are attended to promptly

4 Treatment bookings are scheduled and confirmed with client

PRMPM01A Respond to customer enquiry.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

186

5 Update relevant files and records 1 Business documentation is completed in accordance with company procedures

2 Work allocations are promptly advised to relevant staff

3 Information on the type and source of enquiries is collated to enable subsequent market analysis

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit may be applied to domestic, commercial or industrial enquiries. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Client enquiries may include: pricing, estimates, advice, complaints

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant product and service knowledge Company pricing schedules Work allocation procedures Company policy and procedures Relevant regulations

Telephone customer relations Interpersonal Dispute resolution Verbal and written communication Questioning and listening Accessing regulatory information

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the working environment and reviewing the outcomes of several enquiry responses under normal industry operating conditions If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company procedures for handling and referring enquiries Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM02A Assess pest management options.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM02A Assess pest management options.

This unit may be applied in instances where a variety of options need to be considered and a decision taken as to the best course of action.


1 Obtain access to site 1 Mutually acceptable meeting time is

agreed with client

2 Identity of operator is established to the satisfaction of the client

3 Authority of client or agent requesting services is established

4 Relevant security clearances are obtained

5 Equipment required for safe premises access is identified

6 Requirements for client confidentiality are established

2 Clarify nature of problem 1 Information on client contact with company is reviewed

2 Client needs and perception of problem are clearly established through appropriate questioning and discussion

3 Initial review of site condition is undertaken to confirm client's perception

3 Determine assessment approach 1 Assessment approach is relevant to the nature of the problem

2 Approach is practical and cost effective

3 Approach is acceptable to client and minimises disruption to client activity and existing condition of premises

4 Hazards and level of risk associated with assessment approach are identified and suitable risk control measures adopted to accord with relevant legislation and company OHS & public health policy and procedures

5 Assessment is undertaken in a safe manner using equipment appropriate to the site and pest type

4 Undertake site inspection 1 Type and condition of building and environment is established



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

188


3 Type of pest, activity level and location of harbourages are accurately identified

4 Density of infestation is estimated from available evidence of pest activity

5 Select pest management options 1 Pest management options are effective solutions to identified problem

2 Pest management options meet client needs and are cost effective

3 Options presented meet relevant health and safety, legislative and company requirements

4 Client is provided with accurate and understandable information on treatment options in order to make an informed decision

5 Relevant company policy and procedures are followed in determining suitable methods

6 Additional advice is sought where doubt exists in relation to pest type, health and safety factors or management methods

6 Document assessment as required 1 Information on problem, client requirements and treatment proposed are accurately documented in accordance with company requirements

2 Information on requirements for site preparation prior to treatment is provided to client

3 Copy of assessment documentation is provided to client and company records updated

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit may be applied to domestic, commercial or industrial premises. Pest management assessments as defined in this unit are made in person at the client's premises. Assessment methods include: discussion with client, visual inspection, review of past treatment records



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Hazards during assessment may include: working from heights, ladders, manual handling, confined spaces, infection, disease, dust, electricity, gas Premises may include: domestic houses/flats, commercial kitchens, bars, food preparation areas, factories, warehouses, food retailers, wholesalers, food storage areas, offices Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds and other vertebrates, weeds Identity of operator can be provided by suitable company issued identification card/badge. Client and/or agent may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive house keeper, maintenance manager Confidentiality requirements may include: non-disclosure, time chosen for assessment, extent of on-site advertising Site access approval may be verbal or written. Site security may include: registered entry requirements, electronic surveillance, security clearance Site requirements may include: noise control, sensitivity of occupants to pests and/or management, relationships with other customer activities, presentation, access and egress points, pilot lights, ventilation, pets' bowls Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, breathing mask, face shield, full face mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, sand and other absorbents, all of which are in sound working condition. Cost effective may mean a balance between: affordable by the client, enable profit to be achieved by operator, achieve effective solution Management options may include: application of pesticides, environmental (physical) and /or biological controls Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Information on treatment options may include manufacturers’, industry, government or company publications. Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Assessment documentation may include: written report, detailed quotation, company activity records



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

190

Site preparation may include need for client involvement in: removal of obstacles, making site available for treatment, establishing conditions suitable for treatment Further advice on management methods may be provided by: company specialists or consultants, relevant Government representatives including Dept of Agriculture, Forestry, Quarantine Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of pests Pest life cycles, habits and harbourages Ecology, biology Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace

Interpersonal Verbal and written communication Problem solving Working safely at heights and in confined spaces

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete assessment role under normal industry operating conditions If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company procedures for undertaking and documenting pest management assessments Suitable venue Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM03A Provide quotation.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM03A Provide quotation.


1 Estimate costs 1 Company rate schedules are used to

provide costs where appropriate

2 Suitable allowances for contingencies are provided based on findings from site inspection

3 Costs estimated allow for effective treatment of problem to client’s expectation

2 Confirm costs and method with client 1 Proposed method and costs are presented to client or agent with clear explanations

2 Opportunities are provided for client to seek clarification on costing and proposed methods

3 Evidence of pest activity and locations is shown to client if required

4 Quotation is confirmed with client and signed authorisation obtained to protect client and company interests

5 Health and safety data information is provided in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy

3 Document quotation 1 Quotation format is in accordance with company requirements

2 Information provided is clear, concise and relevant

3 Copy of quotation is provided to client promptly

4 Required company records are updated accurately and promptly

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers pests and pest activity that impact on the health, safety or amenity of persons or environments. This unit may be applied to domestic, commercial or industrial premises



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

194

Quotations are written and may include: company identification information, results of inspection, description of the problem, proposed management method, costs, warranty / guarantee / liability terms and conditions if applicable, limits of treatment, suitable signoff arrangements by company and client, terms of trade Some quotations may also act as an invoice for the work. Quotations may be prepared by: small business owner, supervisor, pest technician, consultant, manager Supporting documentation to quotation may include: formal assessment documents, inspection reports, product/pesticide data sheets, impact statements Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds and other vertebrates, weeds Client and/or agent may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive house keeper, maintenance manager Information on treatment options may include manufacturers, industry, government or company publications. Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of pest, relevant to the area, their life cycles, habits and harbourages Working knowledge of consumer and contract laws Relevant product and service knowledge Company costing and pricing schedules Company policy and procedures in relation to preparing and documenting quotations

Negotiation Costing and estimating Literacy for business correspondence

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Competency in Unit PRM PM02, Assess pest management options, is a pre-requisite. Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete quotation activity under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company procedures for preparing and documenting quotations Suitable venue Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM04A Prepare and present submission for pest management program.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM04A Prepare and present submission for pest management program.

This unit applies to the preparation of formal submission documentation and presentation for a program of pest management.


1 Develop suitable management program 1 Management program is relevant to

client requirements and outcome of assessment

2 Program meets client needs and is cost effective

3 Program developed meets relevant health and safety, legislative and company requirements

4 Principles of integrated pest management are incorporated into program to ensure consistency in approach

2 Estimate labour and material costs 1 Company and/or industry based labour rates and conditions are applied to establish labour costs

2 Availability of required resources and equipment is confirmed with suppliers

3 Detailed program budget is prepared based on all known cost elements according to company and submission requirements

4 Suitable allowances for contingencies are provided based on findings from site inspection

3 Document submission 1 Client requirements and management program are accurately documented in accordance with company and submission requirements

2 Program details are discussed with client to enable amendments prior to submission where possible

3 Submission includes evidence of necessary licencses, insurances, approvals and certifications required to implement program

4 Present submission 1 Presentation is made in a businesslike manner using suitable aids where appropriate



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

198

2 Benefits and rationale for the management program and treatment methods are explained clearly

3 Opportunities are provided for client questions and discussion

5 Obtain confirmed agreement where appropriate

1 Agreement to submission is confirmed in writing by both parties without delay

2 Required company records are updated accurately and promptly

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers pests and pest activity that impact on the health, safety or amenity of persons or environments. Submissions may include: tenders, maintenance programs, proposals Submissions may be prepared by: small business owner, supervisor, consultant, manager Supporting information may include: formal assessment documents, inspection reports, product/pesticide data sheets, impact statements, reference sites, treatment methods used, insurances (workers compensation, public liability, professional indemnity, vehicle), quality assurance certification, licenses held by staff and company, training systems used, reporting procedures, auditing procedures, accounting procedures Premises may include: domestic houses/flats, commercial kitchens, bars, food preparation areas, factories, warehouses, food retailers, wholesalers, food storage areas, offices Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds and other vertebrates, weeds Client and/or agent may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive house keeper, maintenance manager Treatment options may include: application of pesticides, environmental (physical) and /or biological controls Health and safety considerations may include: type of use of site / premises, nature of occupants, existing medical conditions, physical characteristics, access and egress Further advice on management methods may be provided by: company specialists or consultants, relevant Government representatives (Dept of Agriculture, Forestry, Quarantine) Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Information on treatment options may include manufacturers’, industry, government or company publications. Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of pests relevant to the area Pest life cycles, habits and harbourages Ecology, biology to the extent that they are relevant to pest management operations Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace Company policy and procedures for preparing, documenting and making submissions Costing and budgeting

Interpersonal Verbal and written communication Presentation Negotiation Problem solving

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

200

Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and in the office and reviewing the outcome of one complete preparation and presentation under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company procedures for preparing and documenting submissions Suitable venue Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM05A Modify environment to manage pests.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM05A Modify environment to manage pests.

This unit covers the creation of physical conditions in order to manage the pest environment.



agreed with client



4 Premises requiring service are identified accurately



7 Time of service is agreed with client and minimises disruption where possible



3 Client expectations for service are checked against work instructions

4 Initial review of site condition is undertaken to confirm clients' perception

5 Discrepancy between client expectations and work instructions is resolved to suit all parties






Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

202


5 Assessment is undertaken in a safe manner using equipment appropriate to the site and pest type


2 Hazards and associated risks with site are accurately identified to ensure risks to all parties can be minimised




5 Determine management methods 1 Methods selected are suitable for identified pests and are registered for use in the work context proposed

2 Selected methods to be used are appropriate to the environment and use of the premises

3 Hazards and extent of risk associated with selected methods are identified in order that effective control measures can be used

4 The respective obligations of the operator and client are agreed in accordance with the management plan

6 Prepare site for treatment 1 Safe access to site is created to comply with health and safety and company health and safety policy requirements


3 High risk areas are identified and documented to enable suitable action to be taken



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

7 Prepare materials and equipment 1 All materials and equipment identified in the treatment plan are located and securely stored on the site

8 Effect treatment 1 The correct method is selected and its directions for use followed

2 The method is used in accordance with manufacturers' specifications

3 The overall treatment plan is followed to ensure results are within client’s expectations

9 Restore work site 1 The site is restored to condition agreed with client where treatment permits

2 Hazards are rectified prior to handover

10 Clean up and complete appropriate documentation

1 All wastage is secured in suitable receptacles

2 Tools and equipment are collected and removed from site

3 All necessary regulatory documentation is prepared and distributed to the relevant parties

4 All required work records and documentation are completed accurately and promptly

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers pests and pest activity that impact on the health, safety or amenity of persons or environments including vertebrate pests Management plan will incorporate a maintenance and call back schedule Materials include all identified treatments in the treatment plan Methods include: caging, trapping, netting, shooting, baiting High risk areas may include: drilling sites, fuel tanks, pipes (gas and fuel), cabling, toxic refuse Obligations may include: site clearing, preparation, ventilation, hygiene, control of domestic pets, guard animals Housekeeping includes commercial and domestic sites. Wastage security means the disposal in acceptable receptacles.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

204

Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds and other vertebrates, weeds Identity of operator can be provided by suitable company issued identification card/badge. Client and/or agent may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive house keeper, maintenance manager Site access approval may be verbal or written. Site security may include: registered entry requirements, electronic surveillance, security clearance Site requirements may include: noise control, sensitivity of occupants to pests and/or treatments, relationships with other customer activities, presentation, access and egress points Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, breathing mask, face shield, full face mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, sand and other absorbents, all of which are in sound working condition. Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Information on treatment options may include manufacturers’, industry, government or company publications. Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Site preparation may include need for client involvement in: removal of obstacles, making site available for treatment, establishing conditions suitable for treatment Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of pests relevant to the area, their life cycles, habits and harbourages Ecology, biology to the extent that they are relevant to pest management operations Biological controls Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace First aid Product knowledge, including manufacturers’ specifications

Interpersonal Verbal and written communication Meeting timetables Hazard identification Risk assessment and control Work planning and site inspection and preparation Problem solving Working safely at heights and in confined spaces

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Assessment needs to establish competency in essentially non-pesticide controls Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete activity under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company procedures and manufacturers’ specifications/data sheets Suitable venue Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services. Safety equipment, including personal protective equipment Relevant pest management equipment

PRMPM06A Apply pesticide to manage pests.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM06A Apply pesticide to manage pests.

This unit covers the use of pesticides to manage pests other than where fumigants are used or the environment is modified.



agreed with client



4 Premises requiring service are identified accurately






3 Client expectations for service are checked against work instructions

4 Initial review of site condition is undertaken to confirm clients' perception

5 Discrepancy between client expectations and work instructions is resolved to suit all parties




4 Hazards and level of risk associated with assessment approach are identified and suitable health & safety measures adopted to accord with relevant legislation and company OHS & public health policy/procedures

5 Assessment is undertaken in a safe



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

208

manner using equipment appropriate to the site and pest type


2 Hazards and associated risks with site are accurately identified to ensure risks to all parties can be minimised




5 Determine pesticide application 1 Pesticides selected are suitable for identified pests and are registered for use in the work context proposed

2 Pesticides and application method to be used are appropriate to the environment and use of the premises

3 Hazards and extent of risk associated with handling and applying pesticides are identified in order that effective control measures can be used

4 Accurate calculation of pesticide quantities required for the work is made in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and relevant legislation

6 Prepare site for application 1 Hazards and level of risk associated with assessment approach are identified and suitable health & safety measures adopted to accord with relevant legislation and company OHS & public health policy/procedures

2 Safe access to site is established through use of suitable equipment

3 Site is sign posted and barricaded to prevent access where required



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

4 Potential for contamination is identified and suitable steps are taken to reduce risks and prepare for emergency response action

5 Necessary pre-treatment requirements are checked for completion

7 Prepare pesticides and equipment 1 Required protective equipment is selected and fitted in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines

2 Pesticide application and access equipment is adjusted to meet manufacturers' specifications and legislative requirements

3 Hazards associated with the application of the pesticides are identified and control procedures established to minimise risk

4 Pesticides are mixed strictly in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and legislative approval requirements

5 Pesticides are prepared in a location where risk of contamination or exposure is minimised

8 Apply pesticides 1 Pesticides are applied strictly in accordance with manufacturers' specifications, legislative requirements and company policy

2 Application will result in a reduced pest infestation or risk of infestation to meet client requirements

3 Contamination of areas not associated with the pesticide treatment is minimised

4 Site control is exercised until area is again suitable for re-use in accordance with relevant legislation, company policy and procedures and material safety data sheets

5 Emergencies are responded to in accordance with relevant legislation, company policy and procedures and material safety data sheets

6 Client is provided with suitable site maintenance and preventative information

9 Restore work site 1 Site is restored to condition agreed with client




Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

210

10 Clean up and complete records 1 Tools and equipment are decontaminated as necessary and pesticides are secured for transportation and storage

2 Contaminated personal protective equipment is removed and washed prior to reuse and/or disposed of in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy and procedures

3 Personal protective equipment is maintained in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and relevant industry standards

4 All exposed skin is washed promptly to remove any contamination

5 All accidental spillages or over application are removed safely from site and disposed of in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy and procedures

6 Containers and unused pesticides are disposed of in accordance with health and safety legislation and company policy and procedures

7 All required work documentation is completed accurately and promptly

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers pests and pest activity that impact on the health, safety or amenity of persons or environments. This unit may be applied to domestic, commercial or industrial premises. Environment includes: sites, premises, buildings and surroundings, pest control vehicle Pesticides include: insecticide, herbicide, weedicide, rodenticide, fungicide, aviaricide This unit includes biological treatments which may include insect growth regulators and natural pathogens. Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds, other vertebrates, weeds Preparation of locations should consider: ventilation, drainage, absorbency, cross contamination Site control may include: signage, barriers, security, instructions



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Site hazards created may include: holes, dirt, exposed cables, access holes, ladders Pesticide application methods include: space spray treatments, placements (liquid, powder, baits) Site conditions and hazards may include: restricted space, height, weather conditions, slippery floors, electrical cabling, pesticide reactions, environmental impact, waste and refuse disposal, infection and disease transfer, asbestos exposure, naked flame and fire Client and/or agent may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive housekeeper, maintenance manager Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, face shield, dust mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, sand and other absorbents, injectors, dishes, trays, spray equipment, all of which are in sound working condition. Application and site restoration may be influenced by: agreement with client, company requirements, medical condition of facility users, type of client activity Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Information on pesticide may derive from manufacturers’, industry, government or company publications. Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Work records and documentation completed may include: invoices, log books, pesticide application register, company accident and incident records Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Pesticide approval is controlled by: National Registration Authority, State Government authorities (Environment Protection, Agriculture, Primary Industry) Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

212


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Pesticides – group, formulation, application method, appropriate hazard controls, environmental conditions, preparation Types of pests relevant to the area, their life cycles, habits and harbourages Ecology, biology to the extent that they are relevant to pest management operations Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Dangerous goods in use and in transit Hazardous substances in the workplace Product knowledge, including manufacturers’ specifications Emergency response

Interpersonal Verbal and written communication Meeting timetables Hazard identification Risk assessment and control Work planning and site inspection and preparation Working safely at heights and in confined spaces

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Assessment would need to establish competency in dealing with at least one vertebrate and one non-vertebrate pest Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete application role under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM07A Establish and monitor a preventative pest management program.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM07A Establish and monitor a preventative pest management program.

This unit applies where preventative programs are required rather than management through physical treatment.


1 Establish a preventative maintenance

program 1 Objectives of the preventative

maintenance program are determined to establish which are obligatory or discretionary

2 Program is designed to meet company policy and procedures and relevant legislation

3 Design and content are benchmarked against industry programs

4 Parameters are established for design to meet regulatory and internal policy requirements

5 Documentation is prepared in a manner which facilitates the operation of the system

6 System is designed to provide timely reports

2 Communicate details of preventative maintenance program

1 Information on the program is provided to enable marketing aids to be developed

2 Operational manuals are prepared to facilitate communication with and training of staff

3 Enter into contract 1 Program benefits are outlined to clients to enhance opportunity to enter into a contract

2 Program is discussed with client and a range of services to be offered negotiated

3 Contract terms are agreed with client and contract signed

4 Monitor the preventative maintenance program

1 Information is drawn from the system and provided to relevant parties

2 Information on the program is actioned by relevant parties to effect new contracts

3 Effectiveness of program is monitored and adjusted as required to meet objectives



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

214

5 Review the preventative maintenance program system

1 System is regularly reviewed to establish necessary changes

2 System changes improve efficiency and productivity

3 Changes made support measurable improved performance

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers pests and pest activity that impact on the health, safety or amenity of persons or environments. Monitoring systems may be manual or electronic. Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds and other vertebrates, weeds Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Types of pests relevant to the area, their life cycles, habits and harbourages Ecology, biology to the extent that they are relevant to pest management operations Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace Client and job specifications Contractual requirements

Interpersonal Verbal and written communication to the level required to explain, promote and document a maintenance program Problem solving Negotiation and presentation Finding and using information

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. In assessing under this unit, there would need to be a clear demonstration of competency in a broad range of pest management activities Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and the office and reviewing the outcome of one complete activity under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to a range of standard industry preventative pest management programs/strategies Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM08A Inspect and report on timber pests.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM08A Inspect and report on timber pests.

To be used for inspection for the purpose of providing a report, quotation or specification of work.


1 Establish inspection environment 1 Physical characteristics of the site and

location are accurately determined

2 Previous inspection and treatment records are obtained and reviewed where available to establish site history

3 Type of structure and construction methods are accurately determined

4 Location of industry recognised pest pressure areas is confirmed to ensure inspection can target likely pest activity

5 Approach to inspection is determined and agreed with client

2 Plan for inspection 1 Information on site environment and access is used in order to determine a systematic and comprehensive approach to the inspection

2 Appropriate site checklist is obtained or prepared to enable a thorough inspection

3 Hazards and level of risk associated with site are identified and suitable health and safety measures adopted to accord with relevant legislation and company OHS & public health policy and procedures

4 Suitable equipment and personal protective equipment is obtained and prepared in accordance with manufacturers' specifications

3 Carry out inspection for timber pests 1 Predetermined inspection plan is carried out systematically to ensure thorough coverage of site

2 Site health, safety and access constraints are recognised and necessary amendments to inspection plan made

3 Evidence of past or present timber pest activity is obtained using appropriate tools

4 Inspection process is confirmed against suitable checklist to reduce risk of omission or oversight



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

218

4 Analyse inspection results 1 Tests are undertaken on samples and specimens where type of pest or identified activity is inconclusive

2 Type of past or presently active timber pests is positively identified

3 Extent and location of pest infestation is determined as accurately as possible using inspection results

4 Source of pests and conditions conducive to infestation are identified so that suitable treatment and preventative programs can be developed

5 Past, current and potential impact of confirmed timber pest activity is estimated based on available evidence

5 Prepare inspection report 1 Report accurately documents the method of inspection and analysis of evidence

2 Report is formatted in accordance with company requirements and intended client use

3 Inspection clearly identifies scope of report, report exclusions and areas to which inspection access was not possible

4 Report is distributed to relevant parties and copy filed in accordance with company procedures

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers timber pests and their activity in commercial, domestic, industrial, rural environments. Inspections may be: pre building purchase, pre construction, post construction, in response to client request Timber pests may occur in buildings, landscaping, recreation equipment, timber fences, furniture, railings, bridges and stairs. Timber pests may include: termites, borers, fungi Site environment may include: age of timber structure, soil type, timber type, geographic location, level of moisture, associated building or land uses, dark and humid areas, known pest pressure areas, previous treatments, drainage, ventilation, areas available, client restrictions



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Site safety conditions and hazards may include: structural collapse, restricted (confined) space, access and egress points, height, weather conditions, slippery floors, electrical cabling, waste and refuse disposal, infection and disease transfer, asbestos exposure, naked flame and fire, ultra violet light Client may include: owner, property agent, tenant, builder, building inspector, solicitors, conveyancing agents, intending purchasers Inspection records may include: previous written reports, previous inspection reports, invoices, warranties, building approvals, treatment notices on buildings Recognised pest pressure areas may defined by: industry, government bodies, research groups Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, breathing mask, face shield, full face mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, sand and other absorbents, all of which are in sound working condition. Inspection areas may include: external, internal, other timber, location of nest, sub floor areas, poorly ventilated areas, damp areas, furniture Evidence may include: specimens, droppings, evidence of feeding, holes, tracks, chambers, timber rot Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Available information may be limited by physical constraints Inspection reports are written and may be based on: predetermined company formats, legal requirements, insurance requirements, client requirements or a combination of these factors Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

220


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Timber pests - types, habits, life cycle Timber types and relationships to pests Building structures and methods Soil types Climate and geographic impact on pest activities Inspection methods and procedures Legal implications of inspections Company policies and procedures Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace

Observation Equipment use Planning Use of hand tools Working at heights Working in confined spaces Written and verbal communication Report writing Problem solving

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete inspection under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM09A Inform and educate client on pest management.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM09A Inform and educate client on pest management.

This unit covers all contexts in which information may be provided to clients


1 Determine requirements for provision of

advice to client 1 Need for provision of information is

determined from review of pest conditions

2 Information requirements are discussed with client to establish responsibilities and client participation in pest management

3 Requirements of relevant legislation, industry codes of practice or company policies are identified and incorporated

2 Provide information and advice to client 1 Accurate verbal information is provided in a clear and relevant manner based on established evidence and documented to protect interests of all parties

2 Client is provided with evidence of pest conditions or activity

3 Client is provided with opportunities to confirm understanding and seek clarification

4 Reliable documentation and publications suitable to client and nature of pest environment are provided for ongoing reference

5 Information provides client with practical assistance options to participate in the ongoing management of pests

6 Relevant exclusions and limitations are confirmed with client in accordance with company policy and legislative requirements

3 Assist client obtain access to additional information as required

1 Sources of additional information are provided to ensure client can follow up when required

2 Details on company services are provided to assist in subsequent management requirements as required

3 Information on community, government and industry services available to the client are provided where requested



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

222

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers provision of pest information in commercial, domestic, industrial, and rural environments. Pests may include: cockroaches, fleas, flies, mites, bees, wasps, mosquitoes, spiders, rodents, ants, silverfish, carpet beetles, birds, and other vertebrates, weeds Need for information may arise from: existence of pests, pre construction advice, follow on from management or inspection Information may include: pest activity, sources of infestation, conditions for infestation, control and maintenance treatments, legislation and controls covering use of pesticides, impacts on the environment and buildings of alternative treatments Responsibilities and capacities may include: maintenance of site, costs and availability of trained and/or licensed persons Sources of information may include: company publications, industry publications, government information documents Demonstrating may include: providing actual evidence of pest activates of conditions, showing methods for maintenance Client may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive house keeper, maintenance manager Evidence may include: specimens, droppings, evidence of feeding, holes, tracks, chambers, timber rot Evidence may be remote Options may include: pesticides, environmental, biological Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Pests - types, habits, life cycles – relevant to the area Building structures and methods Climate and geographic impact on pest activity Inspection methods and procedures Legal implications of providing advice Company policies and procedures Sources of timber pest control information Available government services Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace

Interpersonal communication Verbal and written communication to a level required to provide clear, accurate advice to a range of clients Listening and provision of feedback Assessing client capacities Demonstrating Problem solving Funding, using and presenting information

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete advisory role under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company policy and procedures for providing advice to clients Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM10A Control timber pests.


Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00



UNIT PRMPM10A Control timber pests.

Applied for eradication or protection against timber pests.


1 Design management plan 1 Inspection report is reviewed to confirm

findings

2 Appropriate agents are selected to ensure control is effected

3 Biological controls are assessed in the context of the management program and used where appropriate

4 Necessary quantities and volumes are calculated to reflect management regime

5 Required protective clothing is selected in accordance with manufacturers' specifications

6 Application and access equipment appropriate for the management program is selected

7 Safe application and installation methods are designed so as to minimise adverse effect on surrounding areas and the public

2 Prepare management agents 1 Pesticides are mixed strictly in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and approval requirements

2 Pesticides are transferred into appropriate mixing containers in a manner which minimises spillage, waste and danger to operator and surroundings

3 Non pesticides are procured and delivered to site to facilitate installation

4 Hazards and level of risk associated with application at the work site are identified and suitable health and safety measures adopted in accordance with relevant legislation and company OHS policy and procedures



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

226

3 Apply designed management plan 1 Management agents are applied to target areas so as to minimise effect on non target areas

2 Pesticide agents are applied in a safe manner so as not to endanger operator, public health or the environment

3 Site control is exercised in accordance with manufacturers', company and legislative requirements

4 Protective measures against timber pests are applied in accordance with management plan

5 Identified timber pests are eradicated in accordance with the management plan

6 Eradication program is reviewed to enable its effectiveness to be checked

4 Restore work site 1 Site is restored to condition agreed with client where application permits


5 Clean up and document management program

1 Tools and equipment are cleaned and stored in a secure location

2 Personal protective clothing and equipment is maintained in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and relevant industry standards

3 Contaminated personal protective equipment is removed and washed to remove contamination prior to reuse and/or disposed of in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy and procedures

4 All exposed skin is washed promptly in accordance with manufacturers' specifications

5 All accidental spillages or over applications are removed safely from the site

6 Required certificates and notices are prepared and issued in accordance with relevant standards

7 All required work records are completed accurately and promptly in accordance with company policy

6 Monitor effectiveness of timber pest control 1 Information is drawn from the system to enable regular followup of effectiveness of control



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

2 Liaison is maintained with the client to monitor management program effectiveness

3 Lines of communication are established with client to facilitate timely feedback of information on management program

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers timber pests and their activity in commercial, domestic, industrial, rural environments. Timber pests may occur in buildings, landscaping, recreation equipment, timber fences, furniture, railings, bridges and stairs. Timber pests may include: termites, borers, fungi Site environment may include: age of timber structure, soil type, timber type, geographic location, level of moisture, associated building or land uses, dark and humid areas, known pest pressure areas, previous treatments, drainage, ventilation Site safety conditions and hazards may include: structural collapse, restricted (confined) space, access and egress points, height, weather conditions, slippery floors, electrical cabling, waste and refuse disposal, infection and disease transfer, asbestos exposure, naked flame and fire, vectors, Client and/or agent may include: owner, property agent, tenant, health inspector, building supervisor, executive house keeper, maintenance manager Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, breathing mask, face shield, full face mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, sand and other absorbents, all of which are in sound working condition. Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions Treatment regime may include: consideration of physical layout, soil types, variations caused by structural constraints Control may be: partial, eradication, exclusion Calculation may include: volumes, surface areas, flow rates, calibration of equipment, assessment of physical characteristics



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

228

Issue may include: delivery by hand and post, affixing to structure Work related records may include: invoices, treatment reports Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Timber pests – types, habits, life cycles Ecology, biology Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace First aid Building structures and methods Product knowledge, including management agents and equipment

Observation Literacy at a level required to complete documentation and prepare management reports to client Numeracy at a level required to calculate product requirements, given manufacturers’ mixing/dilution and application rates Equipment selection and use Recognition of site variations and consequences Working safely at heights and in confined spaces Obtaining and using information Problem solving

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Competency in Unit PRM PM06, Apply pesticide to manage pests is a pre-requisite to competency in this unit.



Review By: 31/11/2001:Ver:2.00

Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete program under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.




Review Date: 30-11-2001: ver2.00

237



UNIT PRMPM11A Eradicate pests through fumigation.

This unit covers the fumigation of pests in a range of contexts where the objective is complete eradication.


1 Respond to request for fumigation 1 Source of request and treatment

requirements are clearly identified

2 Proposed location of fumigation is confirmed and preliminary assessment of suitability made

3 Site security, health, safety and access requirements for fumigation are established

2 Determine type and method of fumigation 1 Type of pests, and nature of commodities are established

2 Method of fumigation is selected to suit type of pest, site conditions and known commodity types

3 Capacity to create sealed fumigation conditions on site is established

4 Type of fumigant is selected in accordance with client, regulatory and manufacturers' specifications to suit identified conditions of fumigation

5 Hazards and extent of risk associated with handling and applying fumigants are identified in order that effective control measures can be used

3 Set up site for fumigation 1 Public, enforcement and regulatory authorities are advised on proposed fumigation where required by regulation to protect the public, client and company interests

2 Fumigation site is barricaded and sign posted in terms of relevant legislation and standards to restrict site entry

3 Site security measures are established to control site access during fumigation in accordance with relevant legislation and manufacturers' specifications

4 Airtight seal is created in fumigation area to ensure site health and safety and maximum effectiveness of application




238

5 Fumigants are transported to site in accordance with required legislation

4 Prepare and release fumigant 1 Required dosage of fumigant is calculated to meet current conditions in accordance with manufacturers' and legislative requirements

2 Fumigant application equipment is set up in accordance with manufacturers' requirements for the existing conditions and proposed application

3 Personal protective equipment is obtained, checked and fitted in accordance with manufacturers', company's and legislative requirements

4 Condition of airtight seal on area to be fumigated is checked and adjusted where necessary

5 Calibration of relevant testing equipment is confirmed as current and relevant to the site conditions and type of fumigant in use

6 Fumigant release into the prepared areas is undertaken in a safe manner at the calculated volume and dispersion rates to enable effective eradication of pests over the active period

7 Fumigant escape is assessed for health and safety implications and immediate action taken to secure site, apply relevant first aid and notify authorities where required

5 Monitor fumigation 1 Fumigation site is monitored to control access and maintain safe conditions during active period

2 Fumigant concentrations are monitored and maintained over active period to ensure effectiveness in fumigation

3 Integrity of airtight seals is monitored and maintained throughout the active fumigation period

4 Fumigant escape is assessed for health and safety implications and immediate action taken to secure site, apply relevant first aid and notify authorities where required




239

6 Ventilate fumigation area 1 Conditions are determined as suitable for ventilation to minimise risks to health and safety

2 Method for safe release of fumigant is determined in accordance with relevant legislative and company policy and procedures

3 Area is ventilated to remove fumigant in a controlled and safe manner

4 Fumigation site and commodities are aerated fully and accurately tested for evidence of residual gas

5 Appropriate gas dispersal of residual and captive fumigant is undertaken to remove risk of exposure to subsequent site users


7 Clear up fumigation site 1 Fumigation equipment, barricades and signs are removed from site and stored in a secure location ready for reuse

8 Update fumigation records 1 Clearance certificate is authorised and provided to appropriate parties where required

2 Fumigation log and equipment records are completed promptly in accordance with client, company, legislation and licensing requirements

3 Documentation is filed and stored in accordance with company and legislation requirements

9 Store, test and maintain personal protective equipment

1 Personal protective equipment is stored in a secure situation to facilitate ready access

2 Personal protective equipment is tested at regular intervals to ensure it is in sound working condition

3 A schedule is established to facilitate maintenance of equipment in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and company policy




240

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Fumigation is the eradication of active pests through the controlled application of fumigants. This unit covers fumigation in commercial, domestic, marine, industrial and rural environments. Work is done in teams of at least two persons. Fumigants are pesticides registered for use in fumigation. 'Area' is the situation being fumigated. 'Site' is where fumigation is carried out. Methods may include: chamber fumigation, sheet fumigation, sealed spaces or a combination of these Site environment for fumigation may include: quarantine centres, bond stores, transport depots, docks, airports, commercial premises, public buildings and structures, domestic premises, planes, marine craft, ships, customs and immigration centres, specialised company fumigation facilities, sporting fields, grain, produce storage facilities, nurseries, glasshouses Site safety conditions and hazards may include: toxicity levels, poisons, flammable and explosive materials, over gassing, damaged goods and premises, restricted (confined) space, access and egress points, height, weather conditions, slippery floors, infection and disease transfer, vectors, ventilation procedures Site application characteristics may include: relative humidity, temperature, wind conditions, treatment base, sensitivity of commodities to fumigant, adsorption and desorption properties of commodities Client may include: owner, owner's agent, customs agents, quarantine officers, health officers Records are written and may include: fumigation logs, invoices, Aust. Quarantine Inspection Service forms, equipment usage and age logs. Details may include site location, rate of application, date and time, container number, fumigant used, monitoring tests, regasing, results. Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, face shield, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: calibrated gas detector, detector tubes, fumigation tarpaulins, sandsnakes, clips or other sealing devices, fumigant mixing dispenser, weight scales, vaporisor, dispersal fans, electrical generator, thermometer, screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, sand and other absorbents, all of which are in sound working condition. Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Company requirements may be found in: operations manuals, induction documentation, training materials, policy and procedures documents, verbal or written instructions




241

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant state or federal legislation, standards and codes of practice include: relevant fumigant licence requirements, relevant public health and OHS legislation, state or federal legislation covering consumer or trade practices, Health and Poisons regulations in each state and relevant Australian Standards, Dangerous goods and hazardous substances legislation, relevant transport legislation

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Fumigants - types, application method, safety requirements, environmental conditions, preparation Commodity adsorption and desorption properties Fumigation site requirements Application equipment Fumigation regulations Relevant Australian and international standards Pests eradicated through fumigation Relevant licence requirements Test methods and readings Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace Quarantine procedures Emergency response

Fumigant equipment use Advanced calculations for volumes, quantities, application rates Working at heights and in confined spaces Written communication for certification and fumigant logs Attention to detail in observing site conditions Working with artificial breathing and protective equipment Applying knowledge of structures to planning fumigation Teamwork

Assessment of competency should be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing activities in the field and reviewing the outcome of one complete fumigation role under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence.




242

Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.




UNIT BSX0008/1 Prepare for training.

This unit is the same as Prepare for Training from the Category 1 Workplace Competency Standards (August 1994).

Category 1 applies to those people who provide training in the workplace, but for whom the training function is not a major part of their job.


1 Confirm the need for training 1 The specific training need is identified

or advised by appropriate personnel

2 The specific training need is confirmed with appropriate personnel

3 The training objectives reflect the specific training need

2 Plan and document training session 1 Training outcomes are clearly stated

2 Steps in the training session follow a logical sequence

3 The training method/s selected are appropriate for the training outcomes, trainee characteristics and availability of equipment and resources

4 Plans for practice by trainees are made

5 Provision for monitoring trainees progress is made

6 Evidence required for assessment and how it will be collected is stated

3 Arrange locations and resources 1 Resources required for training are identified and approved by appropriate personnel

2 Suitable locations for the training are arranged

3 The equipment, tools and other resources required are organised to be




243

available when needed

4 Arrangements are made with any people who are required to help in the training session or in the follow-up to the training session

5 Hazards, accessibility and level of risk associated with training are identified and suitable control measures adopted in accordance with company policy and relevant legislation




244

4 Notify trainees 1 Trainees are notified of the time and place of the training session

2 Trainees’ supervisor(s) are notified of the time and place of any other requirements for the training session

3 The purpose of the training is notified to all involved

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Standards can include: standards set by the work group; organisational policies and procedures; specified work standards; statutory legislation Training may be initiated by: implementation of new work practices and services; organisational restructures; introduction of new technology; identification of performance problems; self-initiated to address performance problems; identified need; or provide development Type of forums for discussion and decision making may include staff and informal meetings The following statements relate to pest management industry context. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Appropriate personnel may include: supervisor; staff; management; company advisors; licensing bodies Equipment and resources may include: session materials; examples of work; exhibits; media display equipment; writing board Accessibility may include: means of access and egress; cost Training hazards may include: use of live examples; use of active pesticides; ongoing client/user activity in the training environment; ergonomic considerations; use of protective and safety equipment Suitable locations may be: on job; off job; through electronic open learning methods Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS; public health; environmental; parks and wildlife; pesticide controls; industrial; consumer protection; trade practices; equal opportunity; anti-discrimination; freedom of information; industry codes of conduct; relevant Australian standards




245

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Training principles and methods Subject matter Assessment methods Eeo principles Relevant ohs standards Audiovisual equipment operation

Report writing Planning Scheduling Organising Contingency Communication

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit is best obtained by observation of the preparation, combined with discussion with the trainer about what has been done. Evidence sought may include: explanation of the specific training need and how it was determined; the trainer's view of appropriate personnel; an outline of the training session; preferably in writing; explanation of the training method(s) selected; recognition of trainee characteristics (e.g. language and literacy/numeracy skills; cultural background; previous experience); knowledge of possible training locations within the workplace; knowledge of relevant safety and health standards to be observed; evidence that trainees and their supervisor know about training arrangements made




247



UNIT BSX0008/2 Deliver training.

This unit is the same as the unit ‘Deliver Training’ in the Category 1 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).


ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 1 Prepare trainees 1 The objectives of the training session are

explained to and discussed with the trainees

2 The sequence of activities to be followed in the training session is explained to trainees

3 Trainees are made aware of the place of the work application of the skill or job being taught

4 Any barriers to the performance of the job being taught are identified and discussed with trainees

5 The assessment process is explained to trainees

2 Instruct trainees 1 A systematic approach is taken to instruction, taking into account explanation, demonstration, review, trainee explanation, trainee demonstration and feedback

2 Instruction process is revised and modified as necessary to meet the trainees' learning needs

3 Trainees are encouraged by positive comments from the trainer

4 Feedback during instruction is designed to help trainees learn from their mistakes

5 Trainees are encouraged and guided to evaluate their own performance and diagnose it for improvement

3 Provide opportunities for practice 1 Practice opportunities are provided according to the specific learning situation and the training objectives





248

3 Trainees' readiness for assessment is monitored


1 Evidence of satisfactory performance by the trainee is collected in accordance with the training session plan

2 The trainee is advised that he/she has reached the required standard of performance

3 Other appropriate personnel are advised that the trainee has reached the required standard of performance

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Standards can include: standards set by the work group, company policy and procedures, specified work standards, statutory legislation Training may be initiated by: implementation of new work practices and services, organisational restructures, introduction of new technology, identification of performance problems, self-initiated to address performance problems, identified need or to provide development The following statements relate to pest management industry context. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Instruction process may include: one to one, small group, large group Practice opportunities may include: practical application, simulated, under direction supervision, in controlled environments Appropriate personnel may include: supervisor, staff, management, company advisors, licensing bodies Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Training principles and methods Subject matter Presentation techniques Audiovisual materials and equipment operation Relevant acts, regulations and codes of practice Ohs requirements Eeo requirements

Instruction Presentation Planning Questioning Time management




249

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance is best obtained by observation of training delivery on a number of occasions. If this is not possible, then at least one direct observation should be supported by supplementary evidence, such as confirmation by a supervisor or discussions with trainees.


PRM98 Asset Maintenance Training Package 251 © Australian National Training Authority (ANTA) 1998




UNIT BSX0008/3 Review training.

This unit is the same as ‘Review Training’ from the Category 1 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).


ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 1 Evaluate training session 1 Trainees are encouraged to raise

problems or difficulties with any aspect of the training session

2 Trainees are asked to discuss their ability to apply the learning outcomes

3 Trainees' reaction to the training session is sought


5 Review comments are summarised


2 Record training 1 The details of the trainees who have completed the training are accurately recorded according to the organisation's requirements

2 Other records as required by legislation or agreement are kept

3 Records are released to authorised personnel only


3 Provide information on training 1 Information on training proposed, in hand or completed is provided to management as required

2 Information on proposed training is provided to prospective trainees on request

3 Information on appropriate, available training is provided to employees on request




252

RANGE OF VARIABLES Standards can include: standards set by the work group, organisational policies and procedures, specified work standards, statutory legislation Training may be initiated by: implementation of new work practices and services, organisational restructures, introduction of new technology, identification of performance problems, self-initiated to address performance problems, identified needs, or provide development The following statements relate to pest management industry context. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Problems and difficulties may include: pace of training, learning difficulties, level of materials used, relevant to work Training records may include: logbooks, attendance sheets, assessment records, manual or computer based systems Information on training may include: company training schedules, training brochures, course outlines and summaries Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Evaluation methods Company policy and procedures relating to training records Available training

Record keeping Analytical Self assessment Questioning Group discussion

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit should best be a combination of observation of the trainer's review with the trainees, an inspection of records and discussion with the trainer about his or her appreciation of the session. Where direct observation is not possible, discussion with the trainees might be a substitute. Evidence sought may include: knowledge of the organisation's record keeping arrangements and security and access procedures





UNIT PRMPM15A Undertake process improvement to reduce costs and improve quality service.

Process improvement contributes to the application of quality related principles to company operations.


1 Identify opportunities for process change 1 Processes are monitored to ensure

they are cost effective, customer focused, error free and achieving planned result

2 Problems are identified and resolved quickly to improve service and prevent recurrence

3 Inconsistencies are identified by comparing processes for similar tasks to ensure the most effective method is being used

2 Encourage development of ideas for improvement

1 Ideas for improvement are given prompt consideration and feedback to maximise possible benefits

2 An environment where improvements are sought and rewarded is maintained

3 Staff are coached through the review of ideas to ensure commitment to solutions

3 Assess viability of new ideas 1 Ideas are discussed and evaluated with operators to determine viability

2 Ideas are assessed against existing practice, precedent and any legislative or company restrictions

3 The contribution of the ideas to service, quality improvement or cost efficiency is identified

4 Balanced judgements on the effectiveness of ideas are made

4 Develop alternatives for process improvement

1 Staff and other area specialists are involved so that all aspects can be considered

2 Regular opportunities are provided to consider alternative approaches to process improvement




254

5 Arrange implementation of viable change 1 Support is provided to operators to facilitate change

2 Change is monitored regularly to ensure anticipated benefits are realised

3 All areas affected by change are advised promptly to minimise disruption and ensure commitment

4 The implementation effort is recognised to encourage continued improvement

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Process may include: company procedures and methods, culture, approaches Process change may occur in systems and procedures. Inconsistencies may include: repetitive processes, work duplication Incentives for process improvement may include: monetary, esteem building, promotion, prizes Ideas can be assessed against their cost effectiveness, ability to add value, improve customer satisfaction, practicality, viability, ease of implementation, degree of management support Other parties involved in process change may include: sales representatives, customers Support for change can include: guidance, counseling, coaching, assistance with resources, training Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place




EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Company quality policy and procedures Relevant process methods for pest management

Interpersonal communication Ideas analysis Team leadership Negotiation Problem solving and analysis Listening and reporting Work planning and organisation

Assessment should be undertaken in a work environment or simulated environment. Evidence of competency is best obtained by the development and assessment of a proposal for process improvement under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with existing and potential clients, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Company procedures and policies Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM16A Resolve client's pest management problems.



257



UNIT PRMPM16A Resolve client's pest management problems.

This unit applies to dealing with customer complaints and concerns regarding company services.


1 Confirm client problems 1 Records are reviewed to establish

history of service

2 Where appropriate, site is inspected with client to confirm existence of problem

3 Existence of problem is otherwise confirmed through suitable discussion with client

4 Details of problem are logged to ensure accurate records are maintained to meet company and legislative requirements

2 Consider response options 1 Details of problem are analysed and available, practical options identified

2 Method to resolve problem is selected and necessary management approval obtained where required

3 Alternative options for action are identified to address contingencies

3 Communicate with clients and/or their agents to resolve problems

1 Legal advice is sought on nature of problem and proposed solution where necessary

2 Agreement is reached through negotiation with client in order to implement proposed solution

3 Outcomes of discussions and agreed actions are documented in accordance with company and legislative requirements

4 Update policy and procedures where required

1 Information on the identified problem and solutions is provided to management to assist in updating company policy and procedures

2 Staff are debriefed on the nature of the problems and solutions implemented to reduce incidence of recurrence




258

RANGE OF VARIABLES Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Problems may include: continued pest problem, level and type of service provided, requests for advice and further assistance, need for reassurance regarding treatment, customer complaints, customer perceptions Responses may include: planned visit, provision of further information, referral to others including specialist advisors Communications may include: personal visit, telephone discussions, presentation Records may include: written reports, verbal discussions with operators Solutions may involve: clear explanation, rectification, mediation, litigation, payment of compensation, no action Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Common pest management service problems and solutions Legal aspects of pest management Customer motivations and expectations Company policy and procedures for handling and documenting customer complaints Relevant product and service knowledge

Problem solving Interpersonal communications, verbal and written Negotiation Report writing Dispute resolution Obtaining and using information and advice




259

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by through practical resolution of actual client problems under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant written correspondence with clients, internal records, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to company procedures for handling complaints Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM17A Repair and maintain service equipment.





UNIT PRMPM17A Repair and maintain service equipment.

This unit applies to the repair and maintenance of equipment used in the provision of pest management services.


1 Identify the need to service and repair

equipment 1 A preventative maintenance strategy is

developed and prioritised to meet health and safety standards, legislative requirements and asset preservation

2 Regular cyclical inspections are carried out and assessed in accordance with company and manufacturers' requirements

3 Equipment user reports are followed up and assessed to identify service requirements

4 Reports are assessed to identify the priority and need for emergency action to ensure safe equipment operation

5 Specialist advice is sought on complex or additional technical matters as required

2 Prepare a plan for service and repair of equipment

1 Work is prepared in accordance with OHS requirements

2 Schedules are developed that minimise equipment downtime

3 Plans and schedules are advised to management and operators to allow effective work plans to be developed

4 Accurate assessment of parts, equipment and labour are specified to meet service and repair needs

5 Liaison with relevant agencies and authorities is undertaken to identify potential hazards and meet relevant compliance requirements

3 Carry out service and repair of equipment 1 Equipment is cleaned and tagged to enable ready identification and a safe working environment

2 All work is carried out in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and company requirements

3 Inspections and approvals are obtained from relevant authorities where required




262

4 Work area is maintained in a clean and orderly manner during the course of the service or repair

5 Equipment is serviced or repaired and returned to service in a safe and productive condition where possible

6 Unserviceable equipment is disposed of in accordance with company policy

4 Carry out regular inspection of equipment 1 Inspection of equipment is regularly carried out to ensure usage is within manufacturers' specifications, relevant legislation and company policy

2 Equipment is physically sighted at regular intervals to establish its existence

3 Check list where appropriate is completed and signed off to verify inspection and update relevant asset records

5 Complete necessary documentation 1 Records for service or repair are completed and filed in accordance with company and legislative requirements

2 Orders, invoices and supply requisitions are prepared in accordance with company policy

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Equipment for repair and maintenance may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, breathing mask, face shield, full face mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, contaminated clothing bag, screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, dishes, trays, spray equipment Documentation may include: service records, warranties, receipts, invoices, maintenance reports Records may be manual or computer based. Service plans may include: maintenance schedules, routine service, replacement procedures, emergency procedures Cyclical inspections may include an asset audit in some circumstances. Agencies and authorities may include: certification and calibration agencies, licensing bodies, local government, government agencies, pesticide regulators




Company policies on equipment may cover: type of use, use for which equipment designed, replacement of equipment, inspection procedures, requirements for use (including licence, training, supervision) Manufacturers specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Plant and equipment functions Spare parts availability and supply OHS requirements Manufacturers’ specifications for equipment Maintenance schedules Relevant company procedures and record systems

Diagnostic skills Equipment operation Written and verbal communication Work organisation and scheduling Time management Records maintenance Ability to read and interpret Specifications and schedules

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by the actual service and maintenance of operating equipment under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from inspection of serviced equipment and related records, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.




264

Resources Requirement for Assessment Access to equipment specifications and maintenance schedules Access to company procedures and policies for maintenance Access to a suitable venue Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM18A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area.





UNIT PRMPM18A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area.

This unit covers the maintenance of a storage area and the movement and control of stock used in the provision of pest services.


1 Maintain area in a clean, tidy and secure

condition 1 Equipment is stored in a clean condition

in an easily accessible location

2 Equipment is regularly cleaned in accordance with company policy

3 Work space is kept clear and free from obstacles

4 Rubbish and litter is regularly removed and disposed of in accordance with appropriate legislation

5 Area is secured from unauthorised access at all time to secure equipment and prevent unauthorised access to pesticides and other chemicals

6 Storage area complies with relevant legislation and codes of practice

7 Relevant charts, symbols or instructions are displayed or otherwise made clearly accessible

2 Control and maintain stocks of consumables 1 Minimum and maximum stock holding levels are identified from usage patterns in accordance with company policy

2 Stock holding levels are regularly checked and stock reordered to maintain required levels

3 Pesticides and other chemicals are stored in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy

4 Stocks are issued on a first in first out basis to maintain currency

5 Decanting and mixing of pesticides and other chemicals is done in accordance with relevant legislation, company policy and manufacturers' specifications

6 All containers are clearly labelled and coded in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and relevant legislation




266

7 Pesticides and other chemicals are kept in a secure location in accordance with manufacturers' specifications, relevant legislation and company policy

8 Obsolete stock is disposed of in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Storage area may be a room or depot isolated from other activities. The area may include: equipment storage bays, pesticide and other chemicals cupboard Information may include: safety data check sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), clients' specifications and schedules, company procedures and policies, OHS regulations, job descriptions, time sheets, work instructions, colour codes, communication books, manufacturers' instructions, operation manuals, placards, chemical registers, chemical manifests Manufacturers specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Site communication devices include: white boards, notice boards, communication books Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place





EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Equipment types and functions Pesticides and other chemicals used in industry OHS requirements for chemical storage and decanting Relevant coding systems Hazardous goods Dangerous goods First aid Stress management

Chemical decanting and mixing Coding methods Written and verbal communications Basic numeracy at a level to calculate product requirements, including mixing/dilution rates & storage requirements Literacy at a level to read and interpret manufacturer or enterprise codes and symbols on stores Relevant first aid applications Planning and organising Record keeping

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observation of actual maintenance of a store and provision of stock control services under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Evidence of competency may be derived from inspections of storage areas; good storage and housekeeping practices, particularly those relating to the labelling and security of chemicals; ease of access to, and accuracy of, stock control records. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Relevant documentation Access to a suitable venue, including stores and stores records Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations.





UNIT PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations.

This unit is applicable where supervision of a small field work team is required.


1 Identify work requirements 1 Work site specifications are reviewed to

identify requirements

2 Clients’ needs and expectations are identified accurately

3 The site characteristics and any special requirements for pest management are identified

2 Organise equipment and materials 1 Pest management equipment and material requirements are estimated and made available in line with past usage

2 Equipment is checked to be in good working order to manufacturers' specifications, relevant legislation and company policy

3 Equipment and tools required are made available to suit work needs

3 Allocate work areas and activities 1 Work is scheduled and allocated to be completed within time available

2 Work allocation to individuals matches known competency and capacity to complete work requirements within relevant legislation and company policy

3 Relevant licences are held appropriate to the work being performed

4 Work allocation occurs within approved budget levels

4 Communicate work requirements 1 Communication in a medium suitable to the situation is undertaken to ensure instructions are clear and understood


5 Provide suitable training and assessment opportunities

1 Appropriate on-job training is provided to staff to fill identified skill gaps and improve work performance




270

2 Opportunities are provided for staff to ask questions and seek clarification on training and work performance matters

3 Assistance is provided to staff where required to ensure compliance with work site requirements

4 Relevant work assessments are undertaken in accordance with industry and company requirements

6 Monitor work activity to meet specifications 1 Work activity is systematically monitored to ensure legislative requirements, industry standards and company requirements are met

2 Prompt follow up occurs on difficult or known problem areas

3 Work is reallocated as required to ensure client and company requirements are met

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit is undertaken within the context of relevant industrial awards and/or other workplace requirements. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Work specifications may be: copy of contract documentation, derived schedules or checklists, building plans and area charts, client correspondence Client expectations and needs may be verbal or written and usually checked against work specification requirements. The competencies and capacity of existing workers are determined from observations, discussion, training records and demonstrations. Estimates for time duration of work are made based on an assessment of condition and past experience with similar methods and sites. Budgets are usually provided by company representatives for the work site and usually define discretionary levels in relations to expenditure areas. Training may include: on-job instruction, provision of learning opportunities, demonstration, structured feedback, self-paced learning packages Assessment may include: review to specifications and other documentation within enterprise and industry policy guidelines, competency assessment for recording purposes Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance.




Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Safe work practices Estimating and quotation Budgets Relevant legislation Company policy and procedures Product knowledge

Safe and efficient work practices Interpersonal communication Customer relations Written communications Team leadership Planning Organising Monitoring Negotiation Contingency management

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing the supervision of a work team under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Evidence of competency may be derived from job records and reports, appropriate selection of equipment and materials, team compliance with legislative requirements and company policy, results obtained in relation to job specifications, supervisor reports and customer satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to a relevant venue, equipment and materials Relevant documentation, including job specifications Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM20A Supervise staff.





UNIT PRMPM20A Supervise staff.

This unit is designed to address performance required for the supervision of all staff in a company.


1 Supervise staff workload 1 Current workload of staff is accurately

assessed

2 Workload is scheduled effectively to facilitate operational efficiency

3 Workload is delegated to appropriate staff members

4 Workload of staff is continuously assessed in accordance with agreed objectives and timelines

5 Staff are assisted in prioritisation of workload

6 Staff rosters are prepared according to organisational policies and procedures and in accordance with any award and legislative requirements

2 Provide feedback to management on staffing matters

1 Feedback on current and potential staffing needs is provided to company management

2 Input is provided to facilitate the implementation of the company's staff appraisal system

3 Advise staff on policies and procedures applying to the workplace

1 Induction programs for new employees are effectively conducted to introduce new employees to the workplace

2 Staff are regularly and accurately briefed on relevant organisation policies and procedures

3 Strategies for the implementation of policies and procedures are communicated to staff

4 Monitor and maintain effective individual and team performance

1 Individual's/team's performance is reviewed on an ongoing basis

2 Feedback on individual's/team’s performance is provided in a constructive manner




274

3 Problems with individual's/team's performance are identified and addressed in accordance with company personnel and employment policies and procedures

4 Relevant legislation and company policy are followed and implemented within the work context

5 Identify and develop individual employee potential

1 Expertise of individual employees is identified, recognised and drawn on in the allocation of tasks

2 Individual employee's competencies are identified in relation to the job, career path and training options

3 Opportunities to transfer and apply skills are provided

6 Maintain records 1 Information is recorded in accordance with company and legislative requirements

2 Details are recorded clearly, accurately and legibly

3 Records are secured, accessible and kept up-to-date

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Employees may include: full-time, part-time, casual, field staff, office staff, subcontractors, licence holders Records may include: information about staff performance, competency assessments Policies and procedures applying to the workplace may include: procedures relating to workplace change processes, disciplinary procedures, award procedures, pay procedures, organisational structures Performance may include: general standard of work, time spent on actual treatment, travelling time, job planning, use of correct preparation levels and usage, attitude to clients, following administrative procedures Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals




Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant company policies/procedures Range of interpersonal communication techniques Anti-discrimination policies and procedures Staff performance monitoring systems Methods of staff assessment and development Team building and teamwork techniques

Interpreting Appraisal Problem solving Contingency management Scheduling Prioritising Advisory Negotiation Delegation Conflict resolution Reporting

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing the conduct of supervision and reviewing a supervisors log over a weeks activity under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant company records and communication, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Relevant company procedures and documentation Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM21A Prepare a business plan.





UNIT PRMPM21A Prepare a business plan.

This unit covers the development of a business plan for the enterprise. It ranges from identification of services to the requirements needed for successful implementation.


1 Identify range of services to be provided 1 Services that match opportunities are

identified and prioritised

2 Suitable range of services to meet identified client needs is determined

2 Establish performance targets 1 Effective and relevant performance targets are established

2 Timeframes are established that are achievable and practical

3 Measures to monitor performance are determined

3 Identify support requirements to achieve targets

1 Information systems are identified that have the capacity to accurately capture and record relevant information

2 Timely and accurate information can be provided from information systems

3 Appropriate human resources to support the service are identified to ensure adequate support and provision of administrative services

4 Requirements for training are identified which ensure all persons are conversant with the service

5 Facilities and equipment which provide effective service support and meet legislative requirements are identified

6 Equipment systems that facilitate work flow and communications are identified

7 Efficient work scheduling systems are identified

8 Efficient operations and procedures for delivering service provision are identified

9 Support systems are compared against relevant industry benchmarks, performance standards and quality assurance requirements




278

10 Business operations are planned to comply with relevant legislation

4 Prepare financial forecasts 1 Sources of income are accurately identified

2 Income forecasts are prepared using business budgeting formats

3 Accurate expenses based on known costs are identified

4 Expense forecasts that allow for contingencies are prepared

5 Adequate return on investment is demonstrated through calculation of a net result for the service

6 Sources and costs of finance to ensure the liquidity of the business are evaluated

5 Plan implementation 1 Plan of activities to achieve required outcomes is prepared

2 Measures and methods to monitor plan implementation and outcomes are established

6 Document the business plan 1 All components of the business plan are integrated in a standard format to business specifications

2 All relevant information and analysis is included in documentation

3 Plans are documented in a logical, concise and conclusive manner

4 Business plan provides clear directions to enable effective decision making to occur

5 Business plan is communicated to relevant parties

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Resources are: people, equipment, facilities, finance, location, goodwill, visibility Business plans may be prepared for: obtaining finance, planned growth and development, introduction of a new or improved service, marketing, improved operations, occupational health and safety, human resources Standard format for business plans may be prescribed by banks and other finance lending institutions




Services may include: termite control, domestic pest control, commercial/industrial pest control, stored products pest control, vertebrae control, lawn and garden pest control, commercial weed control Income may include: fees for services including treatments, inspections, assessments Expenditure may include: materials, equipment, office overheads, maintenance, government fees and charges, training, cost of compliance, capital expenditure Implementation activities include: marketing, administration, systems, training Performance measures may include: market share, sales, return on investment, cross selling, fee income, customer service, level of complaints, chargeable service hours, income per hour, number of jobs, absenteeism and reduced down time, reported incidents/accidents Planning schedules include: milestones, lead times Information systems may include: manual or computerised, industry based recording systems including proprietary software Human resources may include: suitability trained personal, holders of relevant licences, 'fit and proper' person where defined in legislation Equipment and facilities may include: vehicles, storage sites, spray equipment (hand and power), pesticides, computerised application equipment, safety equipment Training may be: formal or informal, on or off the job, service specific of general, dealing with induction or service updating Licences are determined by each State and/or Territory and may include: pest control, fumigation, special vehicle Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place




280


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Industry operations and procedures Potential range of services Business finance Training and skill recognition systems Marketing principles and techniques Relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice Risk assessment and control

Report writing Analysis Clear thinking PC uses and applications Basic negotiation Finding and using information

Assessment of this unit of competency will usually be conducted as part of a work assignment requiring assessment of competency under actual or simulated work conditions Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of an actual business plan developed for industry operations. Alternatively, preparation of a business plan within an appropriate structured and detailed hypothetical situation (scenario) may be used to assess competence. The assessment should include an assessment of the individual’s understanding of factors affecting strategic business planning, including: research techniques used to obtain data explanations demonstrating the ability to obtain, check and use information ability to present planning material and justify planning decisions


Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources, including industry benchmarks Company policies and procedures relevant to business plan preparation Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM22A Prepare, implement and review policy and procedures for company operations.





UNIT PRMPM22A Prepare, implement and review policy and procedures for company operations.

This unit applies to the preparation of policy and procedures for any type of operation or activity within the company.


1 Establish the need for policy and procedures 1 Need for policy / procedures to

contribute to effective and efficient practice in the work area is established

2 Desired outcomes of the establishment of policy or procedures are identified

3 Industry information is regularly reviewed to established the need for new or revised policy / procedures within the organisation

2 Facilitate the development of policy and procedures

1 Consultations with relevant parties are undertaken to ensure support for implementation of agreed policy and procedures

2 Persons contributing to development of policy / procedures are fully informed regarding relevant industry or company requirements

3 Prepare draft policy and procedures 1 Draft policy / procedures documentation is produced covering all required aspects using clear and concise language in a standardised format

2 Policy / procedures developed are consistent with business plan and identified needs

3 Draft policy / procedures comply with all relevant legislation

4 Draft policy / procedures incorporate outcomes of the consultative process and agreement is sought from relevant parties where appropriate

4 Implement policy and procedures 1 All relevant employees are informed to ensure an understanding of issues involved, relevance for operations and ready availability of information

2 All relevant employees are advised of their responsibilities under policy / procedures




282

3 Education and training is given to employees to ensure effective implementation

5 Review policy and procedures against business objectives

1 Mechanisms and criteria for evaluation of policy / procedures are determined

2 Realistic timeframes for evaluation process are determined

3 Feedback from employees on implementation issues and outcomes is evaluated

4 Problems are clearly identified and resolved taking into consideration the needs of all relevant parties

5 Modifications to policy / procedures are made in a timely manner to reflect the need for change confirmed through the review process

RANGE OF VARIABLES

A policy is a statement of intent, principle or direction regarding a specific area of activity within the industry. A procedure is a statement of tasks and associated methods for the conduct of specific work activities. Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Policy and procedures may cover: occupational safety and health, application and treatment methods, client and company responsibilities, training, recruitment, business ethics, compliance with legislation, public relations, vehicle control, equipment use, record keeping, emergency response Relevant parties may include: managers, employers, employees, owners, industry associations, regulators, licensing bodies, suppliers, manufacturers Industry information may be obtained from: government publications and reports, supplier / vendor information, new product releases, industry associations, community views and attitudes, print, television and radio media Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment





EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Industry legislation and regulation Company directions Industry benchmarks

Written and verbal communications Research Forecasting Consultation Evaluation Negotiation Problem solving Contingency management Teamwork

Assessment of this unit is likely to be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business planning and management work assignment. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Evidence of competency is best obtained by citing policies and procedures developed for normal industry operating conditions, including evidence of process followed, implementation and review Supplementary evidence may be derived from questioning relating to planning and review processes and observations of consultations and communication at potential stages in the process. A work-related project, supplemented by supervisor reports, may also be used for assessment. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases or sources of information Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services





UNIT PRMPM23A Develop and implement a marketing strategy.

This unit applies to the marketing of pest management services.


1 Evaluate markets and company capacity for

service 1 Markets for existing or new product

opportunities for the enterprise are identified, researched and analysed for possible entry and / or development

2 An audit of existing service capacities is undertaken to identify scope for increased service provision

3 Preferred business profile is identified from business plans and other enterprise documentation

4 Economic, community, environmental and political trends are assessed for relevance against the business profile

2 Develop marketing strategies and plans 1 Alternative and innovative marketing strategies for the business are identified and compared with existing systems

2 Services and markets for pest management are clearly identified from reliable information

3 Marketing service organisations are identified and services accessed where appropriate

4 Cost effective plans are developed for services, promotional and pricing strategies

3 Implement marketing strategies 1 Suitable advertising and other promotional vehicles are evaluated for cost effectiveness

2 Plans, schedules and targets are set for the introduction of new or improved services

3 Plans take into account the nature of the target client and seasonal pest activity

4 Implementation is directed toward achieving outcomes defined in the marketing strategy




286

4 Monitor marketing strategy 1 Evaluation criteria to assess the effectiveness of marketing are established

2 Accurate records are kept against evaluation criteria to enable reliable decision on performance to be made

3 Marketing strategy is regularly adjusted in response to monitoring of performance

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Marketing strategies may include: target markets by client group, location, pest type, service type Promotional strategies may include a combination of: pricing, public relations, image and presentation, advertising, community education and involvement Service organisations may include: advertising agencies, marketing consultants, industry associations Assessment of existing capacity may include: competency levels, geographic location, condition and type of facilities and equipment, current workloads, new technology Community, environmental, political trends may include: popular attitudes, conservation, degree of knowledge, news coverage Evaluation performance criteria may include: volume of billed business, public response rates, cost per lead, conversion rates, surveys on attitudes and views of company Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Marketing principles and practice Performance evaluation measures

Negotiation Verbal and written communication Budgeting Planning and scheduling Market research and data analysis

Assessment of competency may be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business planning and management work assignment Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment



Evidence of competency is best obtained by citing a marketing strategy prepared for normal industry operating conditions, including evidence of process followed. Evidence of competency may be derived from a number of sources, including: portfolios of material produced by individuals or teams working on a market project interviews and surveys discussions of case studies and hypothetical situations (scenarios)


Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases or sources of information Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM24A Prepare budgets.





UNIT PRMPM24A Prepare budgets.

This unit applies to all types of budgets prepared within pest management operations.


1 Identify context for budget 1 Links between the budget and company

business plans are identified

2 Purpose and intended use of the budget are identified

3 Opportunities and constraints on budget formation are assessed

4 Format and content requirements are identified to ensure compliance with company and legislative requirements

2 Analyse current position 1 Historical data on income and expenditure are considered

2 The impact of current asset status and plans are assessed

3 Trends in income and expenditure are established and causes recognised

3 Forecast income and expenditure 1 All parameters relevant to forecast period are assessed for impact on projected position

2 An appropriate allowance for variation and contingency is built into forecasts

3 Forecasts are realistic and backed by reliable evidence

4 Prepare working budget 1 The draft budget is in an appropriate format, is clear, accurate and easily understood by users

2 The financial requirements of the company are accurately reflected in the draft budget

3 Income and expenditure estimates are clearly identified and are supported by valid, reliable and relevant information

4 Budget proposals are consistent with organisation objectives and ensure the efficient and effective operation of the company

5 The budget proposals are realistic and achievable

6 The working budget is completed within required timeframe




290

7 The working budget is circulated to relevant parties for comment

5 Prepare final budget 1 Comments on draft budget are considered and relevant parties are advised of implications

2 Required modifications to draft budget are agreed and incorporated

3 Proposed budget is completed in required format within required timeframe

4 Relevant people are informed of budget requirements in a timely and precise manner

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Budget may be prepared for: market activities, profit centre or operations, set time periods, bankers, other finance companies Data for budget preparation may include: previous budget, employee costs, overhead costs Sources of data may include: awards, company records, legislative requirements, industrial agreements, regulations and standards applicable to the industry The budget may address: operational income and expenditure, plan objectives, cash flow management, asset replacement, asset sales, entrepreneurial ventures and available revenue sources Relevant parties may include: employees, owners, regulators, financiers Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Taxation Act, Australian accounting practices and codes, public and other liability, Occupational Health and Safety, fair trading legislation, equal opportunity, company codes of practice, corporations law, professional association regulations, codes and guidelines

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Budget processes and procedures Relevant computer software

Negotiation Report presentation Research Interpretation Consultation




Assessment of this unit is likely to be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business planning and management work assignment. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing budgets developed under normal industry operating conditions, using technology appropriate to the workplace. Alternatively, preparation of a budget within an appropriately structured and detailed hypothetical situation (scenario) may be used to assess competence. A work-related project, supplemented by supervisor reports, may also be used for assessment. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources, including industry benchmarks Relevant company policy and procedures Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services





UNIT PRMPM25A Develop and implement a human resource plan.

This unit deals with the planning of human resource requirements for the pest management operation.


1 Analyse present workforce profile 1 Employee data are accessed and

interpreted

2 Data used are current, valid and reliable

3 Competency profiles for positions in present workforce are determined

2 Determine future human resource requirements of the company

1 Business plans are taken into account to ensure human resource initiatives are consistent with objectives and targets

2 Internal/external factors likely to impact on future human resource needs are taken into account

3 Other relevant employees/departments are consulted for information on future requirements

4 A future profile of probable human resource requirements is determined

5 Future competencies required not able to be met by present workforce are identified

3 Develop a human resource plan to bridge any gaps

1 External experts are consulted/engaged where appropriate

2 Strengths and weaknesses of the workforce are identified

3 Company objectives and constraints which will affect human resources requirements are taken into account

4 Strategies to meet present/future human resource deficiencies are incorporated into plan

5 Future human resource requirements are prioritised




294

4 A workplace plan is agreed and put in place 1 An agreement is sought by consultation with employees and other interested parties

2 The workplace plan is documented and distributed

3 Strategies are put into action according to strategic plan

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Relevant parties may include: employees, staff, clients, regulators, industrial representatives, industry associations Staff may include: employees, management, full/part time, casual Data and issues that may be considered include: staff levels, training, competencies held, skill/knowledge base, support facilities, job planning, career planning, procedures, teams, equal opportunity, health and safety, recruitment, growth/decline, liability Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill EEO management plans Company policies and procedures Human resource information management systems Relevant labour market movements and programs Company objectives

Analysis of human resource needs for company Forecast/trend identification Consultation with internal and external contacts Creating/planning/managing human resource strategies Preparation of submissions/reports Analysis of data Communication, including industrial negotiation, staff counselling and motivation

Assessment of this unit is likely to be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business planning and management work arrangement. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of a human resource plan developed under normal industry operating conditions, and the processes followed to meet the defined performance criteria in the standard. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.



Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials.





UNIT PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials.

This unit applies to all types of pest management equipment and materials, and associated procurement procedures.


1 Identify services to be provided 1 Services provided are identified from

business plan and company marketing strategy

2 A classification of types of pests treated and client groups is prepared and reviewed against equipment and material needs

2 Determine performance characteristics of equipment and materials

1 Equipment and materials performance is specified against type of services provided

2 Performance needs of relevant legislation and applicable standards are obtained

3 Equipment and materials fitness for purpose is determined based on product specification

4 Maintenance, repair costs, downtime and life expectancy are established

5 Health and safety performance requirements of personal protective clothing and equipment are identified from manufacturers' specifications

3 Ensure access to equipment and materials 1 Mixture of owned, hired and leased equipment is maintained to suit budget and usage patterns

2 Relationships with suppliers is maintained on suitable trading terms in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy

3 Sources of supply are maintained to optimise stock levels

4 Rights to proprietary equipment and materials is negotiated with suppliers where required

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and material



298

4 Maintain up to date information on industry equipment and materials

1 Business network is maintained in order to access regular and useful information

2 Regulatory and standards authorities are known and arrangements made for receipt of publications

3 Opportunities to test application of new products from suppliers are sought where relevant to services provided

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Materials may include: pesticides and other chemicals, application trays, traps, disposable personal protective clothing and equipment, office requisites, consumables Personal protective clothing and equipment may include: hard hats, safety boots, hair nets, cradles, safety harnesses, breathing mask, face shield, full face mask, respirator, washable hats, overalls, impervious gloves, soap and towel, sunscreen, contaminated clothing bag, all of which are in sound working condition. Tools and equipment may include: screwdrivers, torch, knife, mirrors, drills, flushing agents, probes, magnifying glass, specimen bottle, ladders, cherrypickers, generators, measuring jug, dusters, pumps, extension cords, hoses, camera, flexible light, electronic sounding equipment, waste disposal containers, evaporator chamber, gas tight sheets, scales, signs and cordons, gas detection equipment, sand and other absorbents, all of which are in sound working condition. Manufacturers' specifications and safety data may be found on labels attached to equipment/containers, in company procedures manuals, on material safety data sheets (MSDS) or in notices and posters distributed for display at workplaces or in vehicles Methods of operation may include: single treatment, multi services, chemical or non-chemical, inspection only Access methods include: own your own, leasing, hire, hire purchase, provided by client Suppliers include: manufacturers, distributors, retail outlets Fit for purpose can include: durability in normal working conditions, containment of chemicals, ease of cleaning, application rates, meeting Australian regulation and standards Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include:

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials.



company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Equipment used in the industry Pesticide types Regulations and standards affecting equipment and materials Business methods and operations Financing arrangements Sources of information Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace

Equipment assessment Negotiate purchase / finance arrangements Basic numeracy to compare application claims Basic technical literacy Accessing relevant information, including product information, registration and standards

Assessment of this unit of competency may be conducted as part of an overall business planning and management assignment. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of procurement processes used in normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Evidence of competency should include criteria dealing with the preparation and justification of a strategy to manage the acquisition of equipment and materials over periods of time consistent with enterprise budgeting and strategic planning. Assessment should include consideration of the basis on which choices are made and the individual’s understanding of the budgetary, product performance and human elements of procurement. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources, including product information Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services





UNIT PRMPM27A Minimise business operation risks.

This unit applies to the assessment of all types of business risks and determining control strategies, including the placement of insurances and appropriate risk management.


1 Undertake an assessment of risk 1 Potential liabilities are identified through

an analysis of potential risk situations

2 Relevant standards and codes applicable to activities are identified

3 Objective advice on potential risks is sought where appropriate

2 Ensure compliance with codes and standards

1 Training on application of standards and codes is provided to maximise compliance

2 Work is regularly audited to identify and rectify non compliance practices

3 Activities are modified where appropriate to comply with relevant health and safety standards and codes

4 All equipment and resources are maintained in accordance with manufacturers' specifications

5 Information on health and safety and other standards is made freely available to company staff

3 Maintain suitable insurance covers 1 Risks requiring insurance cover are accurately identified

2 Suitable and comprehensive insurance covers are maintained over required risks

3 Insurance covers are renewed within required timeframes to maintain continuity of cover

4 Monitor activities and changed circumstances for risk

1 Monitoring of risks is regular and planned

2 New services and equipment are assessed for the introduction of new risks

3 Response to identified risk problems is undertaken without delay

4 Regular feedback is sought from operators and other relevant parties on changing circumstances

5 Accurate records are maintained of treatments and applications to provide a suitable audit trail where applicable

PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and material



302

for risk review

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Risk areas may include: operating area health and safety, pesticide usage and security, skill level of operators, target pests, business litigation and continuity, disease, infection, poison bites Insurance cover may include: public liability, professional indemnity, workers compensation, premises and equipment, business interruption, income protection, fire, theft, accidental damage, product liability, environmental impairment, performance liability Relevant / interested parties may include: staff, operators, clients, suppliers, regulators, public Monitoring may include: inspections, formal audits, record keeping Maintenance of insurance covers may include regular reviews as to adequacy of amount and nature of cover Records may include: treatment reports, data sheets, safety reports, quotations and invoices Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant legislation and standards Insurance types, availability and conditions Risk audit procedures Recording keeping systems Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace Relevant company policy and procedures

Risk assessment Information analysis Problem solving Report writing Written and verbal communications

Assessment of this unit may be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business planning and management work assignment. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing the conduct of supervision and reviewing a supervisors log over a weeks activity under normal industry operating conditions. Alternatively, preparation of a budget within an appropriately structured and detailed hypothetical situation (scenario) may be used to assess competence. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM28A Select, set up and control a pest management vehicle.





UNIT PRMPM28A Select, set up and control a pest management vehicle.


1 Select a pest management vehicle 1 Usage requirements for vehicle are

identified by assessing against specification of requirements

2 Suitability of vehicle for pest management activities is confirmed

3 Vehicle is assessed for compliance with relevant legislation and standards

4 Vehicle meets commercial vehicle design requirements and is in a roadworthy condition

2 Set up a pest management vehicle 1 Services to be provided from vehicle are ascertained so that equipment setup is relevant to intended uses

2 Secure arrangements for pesticide transport are made in accordance with relevant legislation, manufacturers' specifications and company policy

3 Vehicle is signed and appropriate identification plates affixed in accordance with relevant legislation

4 Vehicle is set up to enable implementation of appropriate emergency response

5 Equipment and passenger compartments are physically separated to minimise transport risks

6 Equipment and materials area are manufactured from non-absorbent material to reduce buildup of pesticide and other chemical contamination

7 Selected equipment to be exposed to weather is weather resistant

8 Pumps, hoses, fittings and tanks meet anticipated volume / pressure delivery requirements and satisfy relevant legislation and standards

3 Control a pest management vehicle 1 Vehicle is driven at all times by a suitably licensed driver in a safe and courteous manner in accordance with traffic laws and instructions




306

2 Pesticide storage is kept secure and free from spillage at all times


4 Access to regulated locations is confirmed prior to entry

5 Pesticide and other chemical concentrate volumes are kept to a minimum for anticipated work requirements and excess disposed of in accordance with relevant legislation and controls

6 Work and safety equipment is kept secure and in good working order at all times

7 Vehicle control is in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy and procedures

4 Maintain a pest management vehicle 1 Vehicle is serviced to maintain roadworthiness in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy

2 Vehicle is cleaned to remove pesticide contaminants and maintain the public presentation standards of the company

3 Vehicle wash residue is disposed of in accordance with applicable environmental legislation

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Vehicles are designed for commercial use and may include: tray utilities, panel vans, light trucks and vans, equipment trailers Vehicles may be two or four wheel drive. Vehicle equipment may include: lockable pesticide and equipment storage, personal protective clothing and equipment, first aid kit, bulk liquid tanks, pumps, hoses and fixtures, ladder racks, sealed rubbish containers Water supply access facilities are fitted with suitable backflow prevention devices. Regulated locations may include: security work locations, quarantine areas, restricted access areas Suitable signage may include: company name, pest management licence details, relevant material safety data sheet signs, required labels on chemical containers (type and concentration strength) Vehicle clean up is carried out weekly or more frequently as required to maintain required condition.




Cleaning locations provide for safe disposal of run off. Application of this competency should incorporate OHS and public health principles of hazard identification, risk assessment and the hierarchy of controls. Support systems for safe operation (to operator, customer and public) are required for effective performance. Health and safety matters may affect: company staff, suppliers, distributors, retailers, customers (present and future), facility users, onlookers, general public, neighbours, other trades and service providers, inspectors, animals Emergency response action may include: isolation, containment, decontamination, clean up, notification of authorities, first aid, use of appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment Context for operational safety and public health may include: company policy and procedures concerning health and safety, public health, emergency response, training provided for health and safety, company history in health and safety, level of accidents and injuries in the workplace, work methods and processes, product and equipment design, product and equipment selection, product and equipment use, workplace environment, existence of workplace recognition and reward systems, type and level of risk management in place Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: Motor and Commercial Vehicles legislation, motor licence and endorsements, AS 2507 for hose type and specifications, Dangerous and Hazardous Goods Act, code of practice on vehicle decontamination, application guidelines from National Health and Medical Research Council, OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of practice, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant pesticide transport & storage legislation and standards Vehicle types and specifications Access and egress requirements of work sites Types and availability of vehicle equipment Road laws and conditions Prohibited areas for pest management vehicles Suitable cleaning locations Chemical exposure (routes of exposure, chronic and acute effects) Appropriate hazard controls Dangerous goods in use Hazardous substances in the workplace

Driving a commercial vehicle Vehicle mounted equipment operation Finding and using information

Assessment of this unit of competency may be undertaken in conjunction with assessment of the unit, Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment




308

Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of the processes followed to select and set up a vehicle under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations.





UNIT PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations.

This unit applies to all types of planning and scheduling within pest management operations. It has particular relevance to scheduling pest management site visits.


1 Establish type and requirements of available

work 1 Number of job requirements within

required time periods are identified

2 Geographic location of work is identified on suitable map of area

3 Sales orders are reviewed to confirm client expectations for work

4 Anticipated time requirements for each job are estimated through comparison with records of similar work

2 Prepare work schedule 1 Schedules of work allocations are made to maximise productivity and meet client expectations

2 Work route is planned to minimise backtracking, travel time and staff downtime in accordance with relevant legislation and company policy

3 Times for treatment are planned to minimise disruption and discomfort to clients and facility users

4 Weather and other variables are assessed against planned treatments for suitability

5 Work allocations take into account specific skills, preferences and capacities of staff and licences relevant to the work being performed

6 Schedule enables achievement of required business targets over defined period

7 Emergency and urgent work requirements are scheduled for priority attention

3 Monitor and adjust work schedule 1 Changes and reasons for variations to schedule are recorded to enable adjustment of future work requirements

2 Adjustments minimise disruption to achievement of business targets

3 Clients are advised in advance of rescheduled work

PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations.



310

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Schedules may be: paper based or computerised, work diary, to-do lists, charts and wall mounted planning boards Schedules may be prepared for: daily, weekly, monthly or annual timeframes Clients may include: owner, property agent, tenant, builder, real estate agent, building inspector Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of conduct, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Job types Standard industry time allocations for treatments Contingency factors Local conditions and travel routes Scheduling methods Relevant software programs

Estimating Basic numeracy Time management Problem solving and contingency management Verbal and written communication

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of an actual work schedule prepared under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant documentation, including work schedules, supervisor reports and client satisfaction surveys. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources, including industry and enterprise standard time

allocations Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM30A Maintain financial records.





UNIT PRMPM30A Maintain financial records.


1 Reconcile accounts to balance 1 Discrepancies between transaction

documentation and account balances are identified

2 Errors in documentation are rectified or reported where necessary

3 Data are recorded on nominated system within designated timelines

2 Prepare financial institution reconciliations 1 Journal entries and cash payment summaries are checked for accuracy against financial institution statements

2 Discrepancies are noted and resolved or reported where necessary

3 Regular reconciliation reports are produced within designated timelines to provide data required by the company

3 Make journal entries 1 Correct journal is selected for the intended entry

2 Entries to journal are accurate and correctly located

3 Journal entries are supported with explanation and cross-referencing to source documentation

4 Irregularities are noted and actioned for resolution within designated timelines

5 Journal entries are authorised according to company requirements

6 Information is recorded according to company procedures and checked where appropriate

7 Source documents are filed in appropriate location

PRMPM30A Maintain financial records.



312

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. System may be manual or computer based Types of records include: income, daily, monthly, budget variance, monthly expenditure, stock inventories, depreciation schedules, purchases, petty cash register Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Taxation Act, Australian Accounting practices and codes, corporations law

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Company financial policies and procedures Required accounting procedures Organisation ledger system Computer programs Company fees and charges Banking procedures Financial reconciliation

Report writing Prioritising Scheduling Contingency management Negotiation

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing examples of records maintained under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Evidence may be derived from portfolios of material produced by the candidate, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency management and interviews with supervisors or users of the financial records. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment A suitable venue, including workstation, bookkeeping materials and case study materials Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

PRMPM31A Process accounts receivable and payable.





UNIT PRMPM31A Process accounts receivable and payable.

This unit relates to the ongoing accounting activities related to accounts receivable and payable.


1 Collect information and calculate invoice 1 Supporting documentation required for

invoicing is collected and processed

2 Fees and price adjustments are calculated where applicable

3 All calculations are made accurately

4 Correct account category is allocated to the debtor

5 Debtors' ledger is maintained accurately

6 The control account in the general ledger is reconciled

2 Render accounts receivable 1 The statements/invoices are processed accurately and all necessary details of the transaction are included

2 The statement is forwarded within the required timeframe

3 Provide accounts receivable support service 1 Financial enquiries are responded to politely and accurately disclosing information allowable under company policy and procedures

2 Necessary documentation for customer assistance with enquiries is easily accessed

3 Any anomalies identified by customers are investigated and corrected according to company policy and procedures

4 Reconcile invoices for payment 1 Goods received documentation is checked for appropriate signature

2 Invoice is reconciled to goods/services received and purchase order

3 Invoice is checked to ensure all details are correct

4 Payment of invoice is correctly authorised according to company policy and procedures




314

5 Any variances or errors are investigated and rectified or reported to the appropriate person

5 Process documentation for payment 1 Cheque vouchers are raised and checked against invoices

2 Cheques are processed accurately according to company procedures

3 Enquiries from creditors are responded to politely and accurate information is given in compliance with company policy and procedures

6 Maintain accounts payable records 1 Payment is correctly allocated to departmental/section/group accounts

2 Adjustments involving creditors' accounts are correctly transferred to the correct ledger accounts

3 Creditors' ledger is maintained accurately and up to date

4 The control account in the general ledger is reconciled with the total of balances in the creditors' ledger

5 Any discrepancies or irregularities are investigated and/or reported to the appropriate persons

6 Reports are prepared as required

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. System may be manual or computer based Supporting documentation for invoicing may include: order forms, work notes, list of hire fees, standard charges for services Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Taxation Act, Australian Accounting practices and codes, corporations law




EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Standard accounting procedures General and subsidiary ledgers Company accounting system Accounting computer programs used by organisation Double entry bookkeeping operation of computer and manual systems Legal requirements Credit control Sources of credit status information Liquidity management

Customer relations Prioritising Time management Communication Bookkeeping

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing accounts processing under normal industry operating conditions, using technology appropriate to the workplace. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted Evidence may be derived from oral questioning, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency management and interviews with supervisors or users, both internal and external. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM32A Maintain a cash receipting system.





UNIT PRMPM32A Maintain a cash receipting system.


1 Process payments 1 Float is maintained and required

change issued

2 Cheques and credit card payments are examined to ensure correct details and processed according to company procedures

3 Monies are received and receipted accurately and correct change given

4 Monies are balanced against receipts

5 Company security precautions are adhered to

2 Record transactions 1 Receipts are allocated to the correct account numbers in accordance with company policy, accounting standards and legislative requirements

2 Relevant documentation is completed and monies are documented and lodged according to company procedures

3 Irregularities are promptly referred to the appropriate person

4 Transaction records are accurately maintained in line with company procedures and accepted accounting practice

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. System may be manual or computer based Security precautions may include: timelocks, security personnel, codes, nightsafe deposits, external security agencies

PRMPM32A Maintain a cash receipting system.



318

Maintenance of transaction records may include: reconciliation of debtors ledger to general ledger Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Taxation Act, corporations law

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Financial policies and procedures Required accountancy procedures Company ledger system Use of computer equipment/software programs Banking procedures Fees and charges Financial reconciliation Relevant legislation Internal security procedures

Keyboard Cash handling Financial processing Bookkeeping

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing a cash system maintained under normal industry operating conditions, using technology appropriate to the workplace. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Evidence may be derived from oral questioning, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency management, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM33A Maintain credit control.





UNIT PRMPM33A Maintain credit control.

Credit control assists in the maintenance of cash flow and financial liquidity.


1 Identify overdue accounts 1 The current state of accounts payable

is regularly monitored

2 Overdue accounts are identified

3 Overdue accounts are reported to appropriate person in line with company policy and procedures

2 Notify debtor and negotiate payment 1 Debtor is notified of overdue account and any associated interest charges or fines in accordance with company policy and procedures

2 Discussions and negotiations with debtors are conducted firmly and courteously

3 Arrangements are made for payment in line with company policy, procedures and legislative requirements

4 Compliance with arrangements is monitored, and further action taken if necessary according to company policy and procedures

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. System may be manual or computer based. Communications may be required to be in writing under organisation policy. Outstanding accounts may include: fees for service, accounts issued for provision of goods and service Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Consumer Credit Act, Trade Practices Act, corporations law

PRMPM33A Maintain credit control.



320

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Company policy and procedures Company debtors system Debt recovery methods (internal and use of external agency) Computer programs and systems Manual systems and recording methods

Negotiation Scheduling Keyboard Customer relations Conflict resolution

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing credit control, including systems and methods, under normal industry operating conditions using technology appropriate to the workplace. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Evidence may be derived from oral questioning, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency managements, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM34A Manage cash flow.





UNIT PRMPM34A Manage cash flow.


1 Monitor and assess cash flow 1 Cash flow documentation is accurately

maintained

2 Relevant parties are consulted to determine the likely pattern of cash flows and to anticipate any unusual receipts/payments

3 Future cash flows are forecast in accordance with available information

4 Cash budgets are written in the approved format and clearly indicate net cash requirements

5 Cash receipts and payments are monitored against budgeted cash flow

6 Significant deviations from the projected cash flow requirements are assessed and appropriate action taken

2 Invest funds 1 Surplus funds are invested in strict accordance with company policy / procedures and legislative requirements

2 Accurate and up to date information is provided on economic trends and investment return rates

3 Investment situation is monitored and funds are reallocated to maximise returns

4 Liquidity level is maintained according to requirements

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Documents include: cash balances, projections, bank statements, loan debenture certificates

PRMPM34A Manage cash flow.



322

Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Taxation Act, corporations law

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Accepted accounting principles Financial market/economic trends Legislative requirements Company policy and procedures

Analytical Forecasting Research Written and verbal communication

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing cash flow management under normal industry operating conditions, using technology appropriate to the workplace. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Evidence may be derived from oral questioning, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency managements, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM35A Maintain asset management records and control.





UNIT PRMPM35A Maintain asset management records and control.

Asset control applies to all company assets.


1 Classify assets 1 Assets are identified and classified

according to company requirements

2 Classification of assets is consistent with company business plan

2 Record assets 1 The level of disclosure in financial statements is determined/reviewed

2 The benefits of recognizing non-material assets in the company financial reports are balanced against costs arising from the exercise

3 Assets are recorded in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and relevant legislation

3 Determine value of assets 1 Valuation components and unit costs are determined

2 Condition of asset is assessed

3 Useful and residual life of asset are determined

4 Current value of asset is calculated based on valid and reliable information

4 Maintain asset management system 1 Asset management system provides information on assets owned and/or controlled by the company

2 Relevance of asset management system is maintained through consultation with relevant personnel, and continually updated

3 Asset management system provides information on assets by type as well as by functional category

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. System may be manual or computer based.




324

Assets may include: equipment, land, buildings, furniture, vehicles, goodwill, business and marketing contracts Information to assist management strategies may include: details of maintenance schedules, residual life of assets Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Taxation Act, Australian Accounting practices and codes, corporations law

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant accounting standards Relevant accounting practice codes Relevant asset accounting manuals Company policy and procedures

Research Analytical Consultation Planning Interpreting

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment. Evidence of competency is best obtained by reviewing the maintenance of asset management records and control under normal industry operating conditions, using technology appropriate to the workplace. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Evidence may be derived from oral questioning, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency managements, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.






UNIT PRMPM36A Process payroll.


1 Collect and process payroll documentation 1 All required documentation including

timesheets is checked for accuracy and completeness

2 Any anomalies/errors in the documentation are identified, investigated and/or referred to the appropriate person

3 Pay is calculated correctly in line with relevant employee contract, industrial award and/or relevant legislative requirements

4 Details of pay are correctly prepared for presentation to individual employees by the required time

2 Process payment of wages and salaries 1 Pay is prepared correctly and authorised according to company policy and procedures

2 Pay and an employee copy of pay details are issued within designated timeframes

3 Pay enquiries are dealt with promptly and courteously

3 Prepare and process payroll creditors 1 Periodic returns are calculated accurately

2 Payment and supporting documentation is produced and forwarded to creditors within required timeframe

3 Employee group certificate amounts are prepared and balanced from salary records

4 Taxation declaration forms are completed in accordance with Australian Taxation Office requirements

5 Group tax amounts are calculated and/or transcribed and payments made in accordance with Australian Tax Office regulations




326

4 Provide information 1 Personnel data is maintained, updated and supplied to authorised person/department

2 All payroll records required for statutory and auditing purposes are kept accurate and up-to-date

3 Statistical information is forwarded according to statutory requirements

4 Internal reports are forwarded to relevant parties as required or requested

5 Group certificates are produced, reconciled and distributed within required timeframes

5 Maintain records 1 Details are recorded clearly, accurately and legibly

2 Records are secured, accessible and kept up-to-date

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Payment to employees may be via cheque, direct debit or cash Payroll data may include: time sheets, clock cards, leave applications, deductions, variations Pay may include: gross pay, eligible termination pay, statutory and voluntary deductions, leave entitlements Special entitlements may include: meal allowances, travel reimbursements, special condition allowances, overtime Deductions may include: union fees, superannuation, taxation, health benefits and any private deduction arrangements negotiated between employee and council Personnel data may include: leave records Records may include: payroll records required for statutory and auditing purposes System may be computer based or manual Relevant legislation and industry codes include: Australian Accounting practices and codes, taxation act, corporation law



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant awards and legislative requirements (interpretation and application) Taxation requirements Company payroll system Accounting procedures Computer programs

Keyboard Prioritising Scheduling Report writing Form compilation Checking Calculating

Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by observing payroll processing under normal industry operating conditions, using technology appropriate to the workplace. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted Evidence may be derived from oral questioning, case study discussions, exercises involving problem-solving and contingency managements, and supervisor reports. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.


PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements.





UNIT PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements.

This unit covers the development and implementation of arrangements to ensure the company maintains access to suitable human resources.


1 Prepare position and job profile/descriptions 1 Job descriptions provide clear and

concise description of work duties

2 Relevant parties are consulted during the development of job descriptions to ensure perspectives are considered

3 Descriptions are consistent with business plan and operating targets

4 Descriptions provide statements on company policy in key areas, including safe work practices

2 Recruit staff 1 Recruitment methods are selected to suit job and company requirements in accordance with relevant legislation

2 Selection interviews are fair and equitable and in compliance with relevant legislation and company policy

3 Information on competing applications is judged against documented selection criteria

4 All applicants are promptly and accurately informed regarding the outcome of the selection process

3 Implement award/contract arrangements 1 Application of relevant industry awards is determined and arrangement for implementation instigated where appropriate

2 Suitable employee contracts are negotiated where appropriate and full records kept of agreements reached

3 Regular audit of terms and conditions or awards / contracts is undertaken to ensure compliance

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context.

PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements.



330

Position description / job descriptions may include: formal job profiles, incorporate in job advertisements Job descriptions may cover: title of position, duties and responsibilities, reporting arrangements, terms and conditions of employment, company policy requirements (including safety, security, public presentation), rates of pay, overtime, reward schemes Recruitment may include: advertisements, word of mouth, referrals, employment or government agencies, training institutions Relevant parties may include: supervisors, managers, other employees Awards are defined under relevant legislation with coverage for the industry, type of work or work sites involved. Award coverage may vary between states and territories. Employment contracts are documented and are the agreed employment arrangement between employer, employee or employee representatives. May also cover enterprise agreements. Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of practice, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Employment terms and conditions Industry awards Recruitment methods and practices Selection methods and processes Taxation implications

Written and verbal communication Interpersonal Interviewing Decision making Assessment against criteria Report writing

Assessment of this unit is likely to be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business management assignment or work-related project. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of at least two different employment arrangements developed under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant business documentation and correspondence, role plays and case study discussions. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Relevant company policy and procedures Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services Access to a suitable venue.

PRMPM38A Monitor and review staff performance.





UNIT PRMPM38A Monitor and review staff performance.

This unit relates to the ongoing process of assessment of staff performance and development of reward and incentive schemes


1 Undertake staff performance assessment 1 Staff are assessed at regular intervals

against predetermined performance requirements

2 Assessment is fair and equitable to all staff members

3 Staff are advised of assessment requirements in advance

4 Staff are provided with opportunities to question assessment and negotiate outcomes where appropriate

2 Implement rewards and incentives scheme 1 Reward and incentives scheme are designed to assist employees and company reach targets

2 All staff are made aware of rewards and incentive schemes and what is required for achievement

3 Schemes are administered fairly and equitably to all parties

3 Counsel staff 1 Staff counselling occurs promptly to minimise the negative impact of delays

2 Counselling strategies are appropriate to company and individual needs

3 A record of counselling and required action is prepared promptly

4 Counselling is undertaken in a supportive environment that protects the privacy of the individual

5 Referrals to professional services are made as appropriate

4 Implement disciplinary and termination procedures

1 The need for intervention is monitored from company and individual responses to work related activity

2 Requests for intervention are considered and responded to in a fair and equitable manner within agreed procedures

3 Details of decisions and actions taken are fully documented




332

4 Disciplinary and/or termination interviews are conducted in an appropriate manner with a constructive approach in accordance with company policy and relevant legislation

5 The interests of the company and the individual are protected within required and agreed procedures and relevant legislation

6 All other relevant parties are involved and/or advised promptly of actions taken

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Company includes all forms of business enterprises in this context. Performance assessment can be formal or informal. Rewards systems can include: pay bonuses, sales targets, time off, company recognition awards Disciplinary procedures may include: formal processes under required legislation Counselling may include: employee discussions, organised and formal interviews, at the request of employer or employee Relevant legislation and codes may cover State and Federal: OHS, public health, environmental, parks and wildlife, pesticide controls, industrial, consumer protection, trade practices, equal opportunity, anti-discrimination, freedom of information, industry codes of practice, relevant Australian standards

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Employment assessment systems Industrial terms and conditions Employer and employee rights Mediation Confidentiality and privacy provisions

Written and verbal communications Negotiation Decision making Report writing and record keeping Assessment Staff counselling and motivation

Assessment of this unit is likely to be conducted as part of an assessment of an overall business management assignment or work-related project. Assessment of competency may be made through practical demonstration in the work environment or in an simulated work environment Evidence of competency is best obtained by review of at least two different employment arrangements developed under normal industry operating conditions. If this is not practicable, observations in realistic simulated environments may be substituted. Oral questioning and hypothetical situations (scenarios) may also be used to assess competence. Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant business documentation and correspondence, role plays and case study discussions. Information derived from enterprise policy and practices must be treated as commercial-in-confidence.




Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Relevant company policy and procedures Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services Access to a suitable venue.

BSX0008/4 Prepare for Training.





UNIT BSX0008/4 Prepare for Training.

This unit is from the Category 2 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (1994).

Category 2 applies to those people for whom training is a large part of their job, or the full job function within a structured training context.


1 Confirm the need for training 1 Information on training needs is

collected using appropriate investigation methods

2 Appropriate methods of analysis are used to interpret the information

3 Conclusions about the need for training are verified with appropriate personnel

2 Define training requirements 1 Applicable endorsed competency standards are obtained and used

2 Competencies that relate to specific jobs, roles or functions are identified

3 Competencies held by individuals are correctly compared with competencies required for the job, role or function

4 Training outcomes are identified in consultation with relevant parties

5 Barriers to learning are identified

3 Develop training programs 1 The learning outcomes clearly specify performance requirements and underpinning knowledge requirements

2 Sequence and timing of the learning outcomes are recorded

3 Strategies are adopted to make training accessible and effective for all trainees

4 Strategies to overcome barriers to learning are developed

5 Training methods are identified which are appropriate for: the training outcomes, trainee characteristics and availability of equipment and resources

6 Training is designed and developed so that, at appropriate stages, learning will be confirmed and feedback provided to trainees

7 Opportunity is provided for trainees to relate learning to their work situation

8 Trainees are given the opportunity to manage their own learning

9 Learning materials are identified

10 Evidence required for assessment and




336

how it will be collected is stated

11 Training costs are identified and confirmed with appropriate personnel

4 Prepare learning materials 1 Learning outcomes are listed

2 Design decisions are taken to overcome barriers to learning

3 Subject matter required to achieve the learning outcomes is specified

4 Formats for the material are selected which enhance the learning capability of trainees

5 Text appropriate in terms of language, style and level is used

6 Clear, accurate visual materials conforming to display conventions are used

7 Instructions for use of required equipment are provided

8 Copyright laws are observed

5 Manage training events 1 Resources required for training are identified, and approved by appropriate personnel

2 A training location is identified and arranged to support the learning opportunities specified

3 The required equipment, tools and other resources are identified and arranged to support the learning opportunities specified

4 Arrangements are made with any people who are required to help in the training program

5 The training environment arranged is safe and accessible

6 Establish training data bank 1 A list of internal training resource people is maintained

2 External people from whom information on training can be obtained are identified and their names recorded in an accessible form

3 Training materials and information on training and assessment are held in an accessible form

4 An up to date register of likely external courses and providers is maintained




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to those people for whom training is a large part of their job, or the full job function within a structured training context Training provision may range from one-to-one, small group or large group training. It may include both on and off-the-job training provision Training may be organised through formal institutions such as TAFE, private providers, and inhouse trainers. Appropriate investigation methods would include the use of individual performance appraisals, the conduct of a training needs analysis, informal communication with relevant employees including the CEO, department heads and other key people Analysis would include consideration of future directions and associated skill/knowledge needs and the subsequent analysis of individual, organisation needs informally or with a Training Needs Analysis package

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Principles of adult education and training design Relevant company policy and procedures Knowledge of relevant training resources Relevant safety and health standards

Communication Time management Planning and organisation Researching and using information Data base development and management Teamwork and motivation Accuracy, including the ability to draw on personal experience, prior knowledge and mathematical knowledge to check calculations Includes the use of calculation with fractions, decimals and percentages.

Assessment should be undertaken in a work environment or simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit is best gathered from a review of the documented training program and materials and discussion with the trainer. In Element 1 look for: knowledge of investigation methods acceptable rationale for choice of investigation methods necessary range of investigations In Element 2 look for: justification for choice of methods to determine competencies if endorsed competency standards are not available recognition of barriers to learning among trainees such as language, literacy and numeracy skills, or barriers arising from cultural background, physical impairment or previous experience of the trainees In Element 3 look for: knowledge of variety of presentation/training methods explanation of training methods selected recognition of barriers to learning (see below)




338

In Element 4 look for: criteria employed for selecting media, text and visual materials basic knowledge of display conventions knowledge of the import of copyright laws In Element 5 look for: record of venues knowledge of relevant safety and health standards to be observed In Element 6 look for: indexed, annotated records of internal and external training resources

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Portfolio evidence prepared by candidate Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services

BSX0008/5 Deliver Training.





UNIT BSX0008/5 Deliver Training.

This unit is from the Category 2 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).



1 Prepare trainees for the learning experience 1 Training objectives and learning

outcomes are explained to, and discussed with, trainees

2 Any barriers to learning are explored with trainees and addressed

3 The sequence of activities to be followed in the training program is explained to trainees

4 Ways in which the competencies are to be developed and assessed are explained to, and discussed with, trainees

2 Instruct trainees 1 Presentation and training methods are structured and appropriate for the development of the competencies by the trainees

2 Presentation and training methods provide variety, encourage participation and reinforce key points

3 Presentation and training is reviewed and modified as necessary to meet trainees' learning needs

4 Training equipment and materials are used in a way that improves the trainees' learning

5 Information is clear and accurate and presented in correct sequence

6 Trainees are encouraged to participate by asking questions, clarifying points of concern and contributing comments at appropriate and identified stages

7 Supplementary information is provided to enhance and clarify understanding as required

8 Summaries of key points are used at appropriate times in the presentation session to reinforce learning




340

3 Support self-managed learning 1 Opportunities to make choices and decisions are provided

2 Resource materials suitable for self-managed learning are provided

3 Trainees are briefed in their role

4 Health and safety hazards are pointed out to trainees

5 Timely information and advice is given to trainees during the learning process

6 Assistance is provided to those who require help

4 Facilitate group learning 1 Trainees are briefed on the rationale, process and outcomes of a group approach

2 Group training methods are used to maximise learning effectiveness

3 Individuals are assigned to groups in which they can work effectively

4 Groups are provided with clear directions, and guidance on content and process as required

5 Groups are assisted to recognise the needs and requirements of individual members

6 Interventions by the trainer in group discussions are properly managed

7 Review of group processes is shared between the participants and the trainer

5 Provide opportunities for practice 1 Practice opportunities are provided according to the specific learning situation and the training program

2 Trainees' readiness for assessment as having achieved competency is monitored and discussed with trainees

3 Process, rationale and outcomes of practice are discussed with trainees


6 Provide feedback on progress to trainees 1 Trainee's progress is evaluated against learning outcomes, organisation and trainee goals

2 Feedback is given to trainees on the outcomes of progress review

3 Trainees are helped to consider their progress




4 Progress results are diagnosed to provide a guide for the approach to next steps in training

7 Review delivery experience 1 Trainees' reaction to the delivery is sought and discussed at appropriate times

2 Trainer's performance is self-assessed against predetermined goals

3 Adjustment to delivery practices are considered and incorporated

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to those people for whom training is a large part of their job, or the full job function within a structured training context Training provision may range from one-to-one, small group or large group training. It may include both on and off-the job training provision Training may be organised through formal institutions such as TAFE, private providers, and inhouse trainers Appropriate presentation and training methods would involve: language and literacy levels of participants, use of resources appropriate to context and participant abilities, physical setting for learning appropriate to participants Practice opportunities may be on-the-job or simulated

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Principles of adult education and training design Presentation and training methods Preparation and use of training equipment and materials Relevant safety and health standards

Communication, including counselling and motivation Time management Planning and organising Teamwork Negotiation

Assessment should be undertaken in a work environment or simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit is best gathered from observation of training delivery in a number of settings, with different training courses. Discussion with the trainer will be necessary. Furthermore, in Element 1 look for: ways of addressing any barriers to learning among trainees such as language, literacy and numeracy levels, or barriers arising from the cultural background, physical impairment or previous experience of the trainees




342

In element 3 look for: explanation of the criteria for selection of resource materials In element 4 look for: understanding of group processes and dynamics In element 7 look for: evidence of changes made to subsequent delivery practices based on feedback from trainees

Resources Required for Assessment Access to relevant data bases and information sources Access to a suitable venue Assessment materials, including assessment instruments and record books Access to a registered provider of assessment services.

PRMPM41A Assess trainees.





UNIT PRMPM41A Assess trainees.

This unit has been developed to meet the specific needs of the pest management industry in the area of training and development.


1 Establish evidence required 1 Evidence sought is consistent with

endorsed competency standards, where they apply, or else learning outcomes identified in the training program

2 Amount and type of evidence specified is sufficient to enable a valid assessment decision to be made

3 Assessment methods are selected which are appropriate for the skills and knowledge to be assessed

2 Organise assessment 1 Assessment arrangements, evidence requirements and appeal mechanisms (if applicable) are discussed and confirmed with trainees

2 Resources are organised consistent with assessment requirements

3 Relevant people are informed of planned assessment according to the organisation's policy

4 The assessment environment is prepared to facilitate a fair, valid and reliable assessment

5 The assessment environment is safe and accessible

3 Gather evidence 1 Evidence gathered is consistent with endorsed competency standards or learning outcomes specified in the training program

2 Evidence gathered is valid and reliable

3 Evidence gathered is documented according to the organisation's requirements

4 Make the assessment decision 1 Assessment decision is based on evidence gathered




344

2 Evidence is weighed in terms of: validity, authenticity, sufficiency, currency, consistent achievement of specified standard

3 Assessment decision is made in accordance with performance criteria specified in competency standards or learning outcomes in the training program

5 Provide feedback during and after assessment

1 Action is taken to put trainees at ease, as appropriate for the assessment procedure being used

2 Progress is discussed with trainees, as appropriate for the assessment procedures being used

3 Performance is discussed and confirmed with trainees

4 Results are provided to trainees

5 Clear and constructive feedback on results is given to trainees

6 Trainees are encouraged to explore the available ways of overcoming any gaps in their competence revealed by the assessments

7 Trainees are given guidance on further training goals/training opportunities

6 Record assessment results 1 Assessment results are recorded promptly in accordance with organisational procedures and/or legislative requirements

2 Assessment records are stored securely

3 Access to assessment records is restricted to authorised person(s) in accordance with organisation's procedures

7 Review assessment procedure 1 Assessment procedure is reviewed in co-operation with trainees and relevant person(s) in the organisation

2 Changes are made in the training program's assessment procedures in the light of review outcomes

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Where they exist, assessment should utilise assessment instruments developed from competency standards




Resources for assessment may include: workplace assessors, materials for simulated assessments Evidence may include: courses completed and assessed, evidence of on-the-job experience with supervisory endorsement, evidence of relevant experience gained in other contexts including life experiences

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Relevant industry assessment guidelines Relevant quality assurance procedures and requirements in relation to conducting, recording and reviewing assessments

Communication, both written and verbal Negotiation Planning and time management Recording and reporting use and customisation of assessment materials Advising and counselling Records maintenance

Assessment should be undertaken in a work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance should be obtained by observation of the ‘assessor’ preparing for and conducting assessment as well as examination of completed assessment records. This should be supplemented by discussion about the assessment procedure with the ‘assessor’ and the person(s) being assessed. Look for demonstration of: understanding of the range of assessment purposes and assessment contexts and the implications of these

for the person being assessed. understanding of the concepts of validity, authenticity, sufficiency, currency, cost effectiveness and

consistency as they apply to evidence gathering. knowledge of the assessment principles included in this training package.

knowledge of all aspects of the assessment procedure established by the industry enterprise or training

establishment/authority. knowledge of any legal and ethical responsibilities associated with the assessment procedure such as

licensing requirements, equal employment opportunity, disability discrimination and occupational health and safety.

knowledge of relevant health and safety standards to be observed in the assessment process.

knowledge of modifications in the assessment procedure to be applied in the assessment of a person with

special needs. use of appropriate communication and interpersonal skills.


BSX0008/7 Review and promote training.





UNIT BSX0008/7 Review and promote training.

This unit is from the Category 2 Workplace Trainer Competency Standards (August 1994).



1 Evaluate training 1 Training is evaluated against identified

needs and outcomes

2 Trainees are encouraged to raise problems or difficulties with any aspect of the training session

3 Trainees' reaction to training session is sought

4 Trainees are encouraged to evaluate their progress towards achieving competency in the skill or job


6 Provision of training within approved budget is reviewed


2 Record training data 1 Details of training program and participants are recorded in accordance with organisation/industry and/or legislative requirements

2 An appropriate means of storing information on trainees, training programs, and equipment, materials, and resources is established and maintained

3 Existing recording systems are reviewed and improvements suggested

4 Training records are made available to authorised persons and trainees at the required times according to organisational requirements


3 Report on training 1 Reports on training in the organisation are prepared and provided according to organisational requirements

2 Reports are made on future training initiatives




348

3 Information on achievements of the organisation's training is analysed and publicised

4 The contribution of training to organisational goals is reported

4 Promote training 1 Advice on the development of training plans is provided to appropriate committees

2 Information on planned training events is made widely available

3 Benefits of training to individuals and the organisation are publicised

4 Promotional activities are regularly monitored for effectiveness

5 Information is distributed concerning the relationship between training reform and the organisation

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Training may range from one-to-one, small group or large group training. It may include both off and on-the-job training provision

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Underpinning knowledge Underpinning skill Techniques for evaluating training Computer software or other methods for recording training data Relevant company policy and procedures, including reporting requirements

Communication Reporting Data collection and analysis Promotional techniques and strategies

Assessment should be undertaken in a work environment or simulated work environment. Evidence of satisfactory performance in this unit is best gathered by a review of the documentation completed in reviewing and recording the training and its outcomes and promotional material developed by the trainee. Discussion with the trainer will be necessary. Furthermore, in Element 1 look for - evaluation report in Element 2 look for - knowledge of the organisation's record keeping and retrieval systems, security and access procedures awareness of legislative and privacy requirements in Element 4 look for - indexed, annotated records of internal and external training resources





PRMPM11A Eradicate pests through fumigation.



Appendix A

ASSESSMENT PRINCIPLES ADOPTED BY THE MINISTERS FOR VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING 1. Endorsed industry and enterprise standards form the basis of qualifications in the

vocational education and training sector, where they exist 2. Endorsed industry/enterprise standards are the benchmarks for assessment 3. Assessment conducted for the purposes of national recognition should lead to a part or

full qualification under the AQF 4. Assessment should be undertaken or auspiced through a Registered provider 5. Assessment for national recognition purposes shall be conducted within a quality

assurance framework 6. Responsibility for assessment resides with the body that issues the qualification under

the AQF 7. Assessment shall be valid, reliable and fair 8. Assessment systems must incorporate mechanisms for recording, storing and

accessing outcomes 9. Reporting systems should indicate the units of competency that the individual has

attained 10. Assessment systems should incorporate ongoing monitoring and review processes 11. Assessment processes shall provide for the recognition of current competency

regardless of where and how it was developed




352

Appendix B KEY COMPETENCIES WITHIN THE STANDARDS Asset Maintenance

INFO

RM

ATI

ON

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

PLA

NN

ING

TEA

MS

MA

THEM

ATI

CS

PRO

BLE

MS

TEC

HN

OLO

GY

CU

LTU

RES

Code Unit

PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surface 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL02A Restore hard floor finish 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL03A Replace hard floor finish 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL05A Remove stains and spillages from soft floors 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil

from upper layer 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1


2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1


2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1


1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces and fittings 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL11A Spot clean external surfaces to remove all visible marks 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL12A Wash external surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL13A Undertake detail clean of window coverings to remove all

dirt and grime 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

PRMCL14A Maintain a clean room environment with no traces of visible dust

2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1

PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL16A Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free

condition 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

PRMCL18A Clean a unit or location to achieve a low bacteria condition 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 PRMCL19A Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL20A Undertake pressure wash to remove excess or oil based

soil 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource

effectiveness 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure

efficient workflow 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 BSX0008/1 Prepare for training 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 BSX0008/2 Deliver training 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 BSX0008/3 Review training 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 PRMCL32A Recruit and appoint staff to meet work requirements 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1




PRMCL33A Plan for safe and efficient cleaning activities 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL34A Follow relevant OHS policies and procedures to ensure

own safety and that of others 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 PRMCL36A Carry out high level cleaning 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM01A Respond to customer enquiry 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRMPM02A Assess pest management options 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM03A Provide quotation 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM04A Prepare and present submission for pest management

program 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1

PRMPM05A Modify environment to manage pests 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMPM06A Apply pesticide to manage pests 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM07A Establish and monitor a preventative pest management

program 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1

PRMPM08A Inspect and report on timber pests 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMPM09A Inform and educate client on pest management 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 PRMPM10A Control timber pests 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMPM11A Eradicate pests through fumigation 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM15A Undertake process improvement to reduce costs and

improve quality service 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

PRMPM16A Resolve client’s pest management problems 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 PRMPM17A Repair and maintain service equipment 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 PRMPM18A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 PRMPM20A Supervise staff 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 PRMPM21A Prepare a business plan 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 PRMPM22A Prepare, implement and review policy and procedures for

company operations 3 3 2 2 2 3 1 2

PRMPM23A Develop and implement a marketing strategy 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 PRMPM24A Prepare budgets 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 PRMPM25A Develop and implement a human resource plan 3 3 2 2 1 3 1 2 PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and

materials 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1

PRMPM27A Minimise business operation risks 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 PRMPM28A Select, set-up and control a pest management vehicle 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 PRMPM30A Maintain financial records 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMPM31A Process accounts receivable and payable 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 PRMPM32A Maintain cash receipting system 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM33A Maintain credit control 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 PRMPM34A Manage cash flow 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PRMPM35A Maintain asset management records and control 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 PRMPM36A Process payroll 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 PRMPM38A Monitor and review staff performance 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 BSX0008/4 Prepare for training 1 3 3 3 1 2 1 1 BSX0008/5 Deliver training 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 PRMPM41A Assess trainees 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 BSX0008/7 Review and promote training 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2




354

Appendix C AQF LEVEL DESCRIPTORS Senior Secondary Certificate of Education

Studies ranging from traditional academic disciplines taken to prepare students for university entry to more vocational and semi-vocational courses taken to prepare students to enter the workforce directly or to enter formal training programs.

A mix of directed classroom studies, extensive written assessments, formal examinations

and/or common assessment tasks. Other studies may require application of skills, understandings, performance and project work, group work and field-work activities. The balance between breadth as against depth of knowledge and skills, and between academic disciplines and applied and work related courses may vary depending on the needs of the student.

Certificate I Breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and skills would prepare a person to perform a

defined range of activities most of which may be routine and predictable. Applications may include a variety of employment-related skills including preparatory access

and participation skills, broad based induction skills and/or specific workplace skills. They may also include participation in a team or work group.

Certificate II Breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and skills would prepare a person to perform in a

range of varied activities or knowledge application where there is a clearly defined range of contexts in which the choice of actions required is usually clear and there is limited complexity in the range of options to be applied.

Performance of a prescribed range of functions involving known routines and procedures and

some accountability for the quality of outcomes. Applications may include some complex or non-routine activities involving individual

responsibility or autonomy and/or collaboration with others through members of a group or team.

Certificate III Breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and competencies would cover selecting,

adapting and transferring skills and knowledge to new environments and providing technical advice and some leadership in resolution of specific problems. This would be applied across a range of roles in a variety of contexts with some complexity in the extent and choice of options available. Performance of a defined range of skilled operations, usually within a range of broader related activities involving known routines, methods and procedures, where some discretion and judgement is required in the selection of equipment, services or contingency measures and within known time constraints.

Applications may involve some responsibility for others. Participation in teams including group

or team coordination may be involved. Certificate IV Breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and competencies would cover a broad range of

varied activities or application in a wider variety of contexts most of which are complex and non-routine. Leadership and guidance are involved when organising activities of self and others as well as contributing to technical solutions of a non-routine or contingency nature. Performance of a broad range of skilled applications including requirements to evaluate and analyse current practices, develop new criteria and procedures for performing current practices and provision of some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills. Applications involve responsibility for, and limited organisations of, others.

Diploma Breadth, depth and complexity covering planning and initiation of alternative approaches to

skills or knowledge applications across a broad range of technical and/or management requirements, evaluation and coordination.




The self-directed application of knowledge and skills, with substantial depth in some areas where judgement is required in planning and selecting appropriate equipment, services and techniques for self and others.

Applications involve participation in development of strategic initiatives, as well as personal

responsibility and autonomy in performing complex technical operations or organising others. It may include participation in teams including teams concerned with planning and evaluation functions. Group or team coordination may be involved.

The degree of emphasis on breadth as against depth of knowledge and skills may vary

between qualifications granted at this level. Advanced Diploma Breadth, depth and complexity involving analysis, diagnosis, design, planning, execution and

evaluation across a broad range of technical and/or management functions including development of new criteria or applications or knowledge or procedures.

The application of a significant range of fundamental principles and complex techniques

across a wide and often unpredictable variety of contexts in relation to either varied or highly specific functions. Contribution to the development of a broad plan, budget or strategy is involved and accountability and responsibility for self and others in achieving the outcomes is involved.

Applications involve significant judgement in planning, design, technical or leadership

guidance functions related to products, services, operations or procedures. The degree of emphasis on breadth as against depth of knowledge and skills may vary

between qualifications granted at this level. Bachelor Degree The acquisition of a systematic and coherent body of knowledge, the underlying principles and

concepts, and the associated problem-solving techniques.

Development of the academic skills and attitudes necessary to comprehend and evaluate new information, concepts and evidence from a range of sources.

Development of the ability to review, consolidate, extend and apply the knowledge and

techniques learnt. A course leading to this qualification also usually involves major studies in which significant

literature available. Course content is taken to a significant depth and progressively developed to a high level which provides a basis for postgraduates study.

Graduate Certificate The qualification may involve broadening skills of individuals already gained in an

undergraduate program, or developing vocational knowledge and skills in a new professional area.

Graduate Diploma Broadening skills of individuals either already gained in an undergraduate program, or

developing vocational knowledge and skills in a new professional area and/or further specialisation within a systematic and coherent body of knowledge.

Masters Degree The enhancement of specific professional or vocational skills which may be undertaken by

directed coursework and/or research, and the acquisition of indepth understanding in a specific area of knowledge which is usually undertaken through research.

Doctoral Degree A searching review of the literature, experimentation or other systematic approach to the

relevant body of knowledge. The undertaking of an original research project resulting in a significant contribution to

knowledge and understanding and/or the application of knowledge within a discipline or field of study.

The preparation of a substantial and well ordered thesis, demonstrating the relationship of the

research to the broader framework of the discipline or field of study. Application of knowledge within a field of study.




356

Appendix D ASSET MAINTENANCE: UNIT SUMMARY

Asset Maintenance Asset Maintenance Asset Maintenance CL CLEANING CL CLEANING CL CLEANING

UNIT: PRMCL01A Maintain hard floor surface

UNIT: PRMCL02A Restore hard floor finish

UNIT PRMCL03A Replace hard floor finish

1 Identify type and condition of hard floor, soil type and size of area to be maintained

2 Select and set up equipment

3 Set up area

4 Sweep surface where waste needs to be collected


6 Apply damp mop to floor surface where removal of adhered soil is required

7 Buff hard floor where required to improve appearance

8 Dispose of collected waste

9 Clean and store equipment

1 Identify floor type, texture, condition and restore method

Select and set up equipment

Set up site

Scrub floor where embedded soil is to be removed

Apply dust mop to surface where removal of fine dust is required

6 Polish or spray buff surface where required to restore appearance and condition

7 Restore work area to original layout


1 Identify floor and finish requirements

2 Select and prepare equipment and sealant

3 Set up site

4 Strip and prepare surface for sealant/finish


6 Apply sealant to floor


8 Restore floor to original condition


UNIT: PRMCL04A Maintain soft floor

UNIT: PRMCL05A Remove stains and spillages from soft floors

UNIT: PRMCL06A Dry foam shampoo carpet to remove inground dirt and soil from upper layer

1 Identify type and condition of soft floor

2 Determine method and prepare equipment

3 Remove waste where required

4 Vacuum to remove any remaining waste where necessary

5 Rake or sweep soft surface to remove inground waste where required


1 Identify type of spot or spillage

2 Determine remedial action

3 Apply chemical softening agent

4 Remove foreign material

5 Evaluate and report results

1 Set up site

2 Set up dry foam machinery and equipment

3 Pre-spot soft floor to remove stains

4 Apply dry foam to soft floor

5 Vacuum dry foam from soft floor

6 Clean and pack machinery and equipment

7 Return site to condition required by client




Asset Maintenance Asset Maintenance Asset Maintenance

CL CLEANING CL CLEANING CL CLEANING

UNIT: PRMCL07A Remove dirt and soil from soft floors or fabric upholstery using a water extraction method

UNIT: PRMCL08A Bonnet buff soft floor to achieve a clean surface appearance

UNIT: PRMCL09A Wash and squeegee glass surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime

1 Set up site

2 Set up extraction machinery and equipment

3 Pre-spray surface

4 Apply extraction wand to surface

5 Clean and pack machinery and equipment


1 Set up site

2 Set up bonnet equipment

3 Pre-spray soft floor

4 Apply bonnet to floor using rotary machine

5 Apply drying bonnet to soft floor

6 Clean and pack equipment


1 Set up site for glass cleaning

2 Select and prepare glass cleaning equipment

3 Prepare glass surface

4 Apply washing and squeegee equipment to glass surface

5 Clean up and restore site to original condition



UNIT: PRMCL10A Maintain ceiling surfaces UNIT: PRMCL11A Spot clean external

surfaces to remove all visible marks UNIT: PRMCL12A Wash external

surfaces to remove all visible dirt and grime

1 Prepare work site

2 Select and prepare equipment

3 Detail ceiling surfaces and fittings



2 Identify need for spot cleaning

3 Apply cleaning agent


1 Identify and confirm need to wash external walls

2 Obtain and set up washing equipment

3 Apply washing equipment to external wall

4 Clean and store washing implements



UNIT: PRMCL13A Undertake detail clean of window coverings to remove all dirt and grime

UNIT: PRMCL14A Maintain a clean room environment with no traces of visible dust

UNIT: PRMCL15A Maintain furniture and fittings and dress an area or room

1 Review the need for cleaning window coverings

2 Plan the job groups for window covering cleaning

3 Prepare the washing site

4 Remove window coverings

5 Wash and dry coverings

6 Refit window coverings

7 Clean and restore wash area


2 Prepare room for cleaning

3 Wipe all accessible surfaces

4 Apply vacuum extraction to inaccessible surfaces

5 Apply dust control mop

6 Damp mop floors if required by client

7 Buff floors if required by client


1 Assess area to be cleaned and dressed


3 Dust surfaces to remove waste where required

4 Damp wipe furniture and fittings to remove adhered soils where required

5 Spot clean surfaces where required

6 Apply polish to restore applicable surfaces where required





358



UNIT: PRMCL16A Wash furniture and fittings to remove grime

UNIT: PRMCL17A Maintain wet area in an odour free, soil and hazard free condition

UNIT: PRMCL18A Clean a unit or location to achieve a low bacteria condition

1 Assess if work area is available for washing

2 Obtain washing implements

3 Set up work area for washing

4 Spot clean heavily soiled surfaces

5 Apply diluted cleaning agent to furniture and fittings


1 Assess area to be cleaned

2 Set up work area

3 Remove soil from surface areas

4 Replenish and replace consumables


1 Ascertain the special requirements for cleaning the low bacteria location

2 Select appropriate methods and procedures

3 Select and assemble tools and equipment

4 Organise work to follow scheduled procedures

5 Wear protective clothing where required

6 Apply selected procedures to low bacteria area

7 Adjust methods and procedures are adjusted to meet demands of the situation

8 Determine that the requirements

of the applied procedures have been met


10 Correct waste disposal methods are applied


UNIT: PRMCL19A Remove waste to maintain a tidy environment/area

UNIT: PRMCL20A Undertake pressure wash to remove excessive or oil based soil

UNIT: PRMCL21A Maintain industrial machinery in a soil free condition

1 Obtain waste pickup equipment

2 Transfer waste to portable carrier

3 Deliver waste to disposal point

4 Identify and sort waste where required


1 Identify the suitability of pressure wash for the area

2 Obtain and set up equipment

3 Prepare surface for cleaning

4 Apply pressure stream to area


1 Assess if industry machinery is available for cleaning

2 Determine method of cleaning

3 Prepare for cleaning

4 Remove soil from machinery 5 Clean and store equipment


UNIT: PRMCL22A Organise and monitor work to maximise resource effectiveness

UNIT: PRMCL23A Facilitate effective workplace relationships

UNIT: PRMCL24A Control the supply of equipment and materials to ensure efficient workflow

1 Identify work requirements 2 Prepare equipment and materials 3 Allocate work areas and activities 4 Communicate work requirements 5 Monitor work activity to meet

specification

1 Clearly communicate workplace expectations

2 Implement relevant company and legislative workplace requirements

3 Assist in resolving workplace conflict 4 Facilitate development of staff

1 Maintain up to date technical knowledge

2 Where required, identify equipment and materials needed for site

3 Maintain sufficient stock and equipment levels to meet work requirements

4 Assess effectiveness of equipment and materials






UNIT: PRMCL25A Respond to requests for variations to specifications

UNIT: PRMCL26A Facilitate effective customer relationships

UNIT: PRMCL27A Facilitate effective team work

1 Assess requests for variation

2 Prepare and present quotation

1 Undertake proactive client liaison

2 Identify client needs

1 Determine suitable team work roles

2 Plan team activities

3 Contribute to effective team work

4 Monitor and review team performance



UNIT: PRMCL28A Monitor and maintain OHS standards in the workplace

UNIT: BSX0008/1 Prepare for training UNIT: BSX0008/2 Deliver training

1 Provide information to the work group about relevant OHS matters

2 Implement and monitor participative arrangements for the management of OHS at the work site

3 Implement and monitor procedures for identifying hazards and assessing risks

4 Implement and monitor procedures for controlling risks

5 Implement procedures for dealing with hazardous events

6 Implement and monitor procedures for providing OHS training

7 Implement and monitor procedures for maintaining OHS records

1 Confirm the need for training

2 Plan and document training session

3 Arrange locations and resources

4 Notify trainees

1 Prepare trainees

2 Instruct trainees

3 Provide opportunities for practice



UNIT: BSX0008/3 Review training UNIT: PRMCL32A RECRUIT AND APPOINT STAFF TO MEET WORK REQUIREMENTS

UNIT: PRMCL33A Plan for safe and efficient cleaning activities

1 Evaluate training session

2 Record training

3 Provide information on training

1 Identify staffing requirements

2 Select staff to meet requirements

3 Appoint and induct staff

1 Assess the cleaning situation

2 Identify possible work restrictions

3 Select and plan for a suitable work method

4 Report on variations




360


UNIT: PRMCL34A Follow relevant OHS policies and procedures to ensure own safety and that of others

UNIT: PRMCL35A Maintain a cleaning storage area

UNIT: PRMCL36A Carry out high level cleaning

1 Follow workplace procedures for hazard identification and risk control

2 Contribute to participative arrangements for the management of OHS

1 Maintain area in a clean, tidy and secure condition

2 Control and maintain stocks of consumables

3 Maintain and display cleaning site information

1 Assess site and determine method

2 Set up site and equipment

3 Perform high cleaning operations

4 Clean site and store equipment


PM PEST MANAGEMENT PM PEST MANAGEMENT PM PEST MANAGEMENT

UNIT: PRMPM01A Respond to customer enquiry

UNIT: PRMPM02A Assess pest management options

UNIT: PRMPM03A Provide quotation

1 Identify nature and type of enquiry

2 Research information relevant to enquiry

3 Determine suitable response

4 Communicate advice and pricing information

5 Update relevant files and records

1 Obtain access to site

2 Clarify nature of problem

3 Determine assessment approach

4 Undertake site inspection

5 Select pest management options

6 Document assessment as required

1 Estimate costs

2 Confirm costs and method with client

3 Document quotation

Asset Maintenance Asset Maintenance Asset Maintenance PM PEST MANAGEMENT PM PEST MANAGEMENT PM PEST MANAGEMENT

UNIT: PRMPM04A Prepare and present submission for pest management programs

UNIT: PRMPM05A Modify environment to manage pests

UNIT: PRMPM06A Apply pesticide to manage pests

1 Develop suitable management program

2 Estimate labour and material costs

3 Document submission

4 Present submission

5 Obtain confirmed agreement where appropriate





5 Determine management methods

6 Prepare site for treatment

7 Prepare materials and equipment

8 Effect treatment

9 Restore work site

10 Clean up and complete appropriate documentation





5 Determine pesticide application

6 Prepare site for application

7 Prepare pesticides and equipment

8 Apply pesticides

9 Restore work site

10 Clean up and complete records



UNIT: PRMPM07A Establish and UNIT: PRMPM08A Inspect and report on UNIT: PRMPM09A Inform and




monitor a preventative pest management program

timber pests educate client on pest management

1 Establish a preventative maintenance program

2 Communicate details of preventative maintenance program

3 Enter into contract

4 Monitor the preventative maintenance program

5 Review the preventative maintenance program system

1 Establish inspection environment

2 Plan for inspection

3 Carry out inspection for timber pests

4 Analyse inspection results

5 Prepare inspection report

1 Determine requirements for provision of advice to client

2 Provide information and advice to client

3 Assess client to obtain access to additional information as required


UNIT: PRMPM10A Control timber pests

UNIT: PRMPM11A Eradicate pests through fumigation

UNIT: BSX0008/1 Prepare for training

1 Design management plan

2 Prepare management agents

3 Apply designed management plan

4 Restore work site

5 Clean up and document management program

6 Monitor effectiveness of timber pest control

1 Respond to request for fumigation

2 Determine type and method of fumigation

3 Set up site for fumigation

4 Prepare and release fumigant

5 Monitor fumigation

6 Ventilate fumigation area

7 Clear up fumigation site

8 Update fumigation records

9 Store, test and maintain personal protective equipment


2 Plan and document training session

3 Arrange locations and resources

4 Notify trainees


UNIT: BSX0008/2 Deliver training UNIT: BSX0008/3 Review training UNIT: PRMPM15A Undertake process improvement to reduce costs and improve quality service

1 Prepare trainees

2 Instruct trainees



1 Evaluate training session

2 Record training

3 Provide information on training

1 Identify opportunities for process change

2 Encourage development of ideas for improvement

3 Assess viability of new ideas

4 Develop alternatives for process improvement

5 Arrangement implementation of viable change



UNIT: PRMPM16A Resolve client’s pest management problems

UNIT: PRMPM17A Repair and maintain service equipment

UNIT: PRMPM18A Maintain an equipment and consumables storage area

1 Confirm client problems

2 Consider response options

1 Identify the need to service and repair equipment

1 Maintain area in a clean, tidy and secure condition




362

3 Communicate with clients and/or their agents to resolve problems

4 Update policy and procedures where required

2 Prepare a plan for service and repair of equipment

3 Carry out service and repair of equipment

4 Carry out regular inspection of equipment

5 Complete necessary documentation

2 Control and maintain stocks of consumables


UNIT: PRMPM19A Organise and monitor pest management operations

UNIT: PRMPM20A Supervise staff UNIT: PRMPM21A Prepare a business plan

1 Identify work requirements

2 Organise equipment and materials

3 Allocate work areas and activities

4 Communicate work requirements

5 Provide suitable training and assessment opportunities

6 Monitor work activity to meet specifications

1 Supervise staff workload

2 Provide feedback to management on staffing matters

3 Advise staff on policies and procedures applying to the workplace

4 Monitor and maintain effective individual and team performance

5 Identify and develop individual employee potential

6 Maintain records

1 Identify range of services to be provided

2 Establish performance targets

3 Identify support requirements to achieve targets

4 Prepare financial forecasts

5 Plan implementation

6 Document the business plan


UNIT: PRMPM22A Prepare, implement and review policy and procedures for company operations

UNIT: PRMPM23A Develop and implement a marketing strategy

UNIT: PRMPM24A Prepare budgets

1 Establish the need for policy and procedures

2 Facilitate the development of policy and procedures

3 Prepare draft policy and procedures

4 Implement policy and procedures

5 Review policy and procedures against business objectives

1 Evaluate markets and company capacity for service

2 Develop marketing strategies and plans

3 Implement marketing strategies

4 Monitor marketing strategy

1 Identify context for budget

2 Analyse current position

3 Forecast income and expenditure

4 Prepare working budget

5 Prepare final budget





UNIT: PRMPM25A Develop and implement a human resource plan

UNIT: PRMPM26A Select and obtain pest management equipment and materials

UNIT: PRMPM27A Minimise business operation risks

1 Analyse present workforce profile

2 Determine future human resource requirements of the company

3 Develop a human resource plan to bridge any gaps

4 A workplace plan is agreed and put in place

1 Identify services to be provided

2 Determine performance characteristics of equipment and materials

3 Ensure access to equipment and materials

4 Maintain up to date information on industry equipment and materials

1. Undertake an assessment of risk

2. Ensure compliance with codes and standards

3. Maintain suitable insurance covers

4. Monitor activities and changed circumstances for risk


UNIT: PRMPM28A Select, set up and control a pest management vehicle

UNIT: PRMPM29A Plan and schedule pest management operations

UNIT: PRMPM30A Maintain financial records

1 Select a pest management vehicle

2 Set up a pest management vehicle

3 Control a pest management vehicle

4 Maintain a pest management vehicle

1. Establish type and requirements of available work

2. Prepare work schedule

3. Monitor and adjust work schedule

1 Reconcile accounts to balance

2 Prepare financial institution reconciliations

3 Make journal entries


UNIT: PRMPM31A Process accounts receivable and payable

UNIT: PRMPM32A Maintain a cash receipting system

UNIT: PRMPM33A Maintain credit control

1 Collect information and calculate invoice

2 Render accounts receivable

3 Provide accounts receivable support service

4 Reconcile invoices for payment

5 Process documentation for payment

6 Maintain accounts payable records

1 Process payments

2 Record transactions

1 Identify overdue accounts

2 Notify debtor and negotiate payment




364


UNIT: PRMPM34A Manage cash flow

UNIT: PRMPM35A Maintain asset management records and control

UNIT: PRMPM36A Process payroll

1 Monitor and assess cash flow

2 Invest funds

1 Classify assets

2 Record assets

3 Determine value of assets

4 Maintain asset management system

1 Collect and process payroll documentation

2 Process payment of wages and salaries

3 Prepare and process payroll creditors



UNIT: PRMPM37A Prepare and implement employment arrangements

UNIT: PRMPM38A MONITOR AND REVIEW STAFF PERFORMANCE

UNIT: BSX0008/4 Prepare for Training

1 Prepare position and job profile/descriptions

2 Recruit staff

3 Implement award/contract arrangements

1 Undertake staff performance assessment

2 Implement rewards and incentives scheme

3 Counsel staff

4 Implement disciplinary and termination procedures


2 Define training requirements

3 Develop training programs

4 Prepare learning materials

5 Manage training events

6 Establish training data bank


UNIT: BSX0008/5 Deliver Training UNIT: PRMPM41A ASSESS TRAINEES UNIT: BSX0008/7 Review and promote training

1 Prepare trainees for the learning experience

2 Instruct trainees

3 Support self-managed learning

4 Facilitate group learning


6 Provide feedback on progress to trainees

7 Review delivery experience

1 Establish evidence required

2 Organise assessment

3 Gather evidence

4 Make the assessment decision

5 Provide feedback during and after assessment

6 Record assessment results

7 Review assessment procedure

1 Evaluate training

2 Record training data

3 Report on training

4 Promote training